WO2020164408A1 - 通信方法和通信装置 - Google Patents

通信方法和通信装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020164408A1
WO2020164408A1 PCT/CN2020/074256 CN2020074256W WO2020164408A1 WO 2020164408 A1 WO2020164408 A1 WO 2020164408A1 CN 2020074256 W CN2020074256 W CN 2020074256W WO 2020164408 A1 WO2020164408 A1 WO 2020164408A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
ssb
network device
information
request message
communication
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/074256
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
杨水根
韩锋
晋英豪
谭巍
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to EP20755403.1A priority Critical patent/EP3920614A4/en
Publication of WO2020164408A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020164408A1/zh
Priority to US17/401,682 priority patent/US20210377887A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L27/00—Modulated-carrier systems
    • H04L27/26—Systems using multi-frequency codes
    • H04L27/2601—Multicarrier modulation systems
    • H04L27/2602—Signal structure
    • H04L27/261—Details of reference signals
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W56/00—Synchronisation arrangements
    • H04W56/001—Synchronization between nodes
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/20—Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/27—Control channels or signalling for resource management between access points
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L27/00—Modulated-carrier systems
    • H04L27/26—Systems using multi-frequency codes
    • H04L27/2601—Multicarrier modulation systems
    • H04L27/2602—Signal structure
    • H04L27/26025—Numerology, i.e. varying one or more of symbol duration, subcarrier spacing, Fourier transform size, sampling rate or down-clocking
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L47/00—Traffic control in data switching networks
    • H04L47/10—Flow control; Congestion control
    • H04L47/12—Avoiding congestion; Recovering from congestion
    • H04L47/125—Avoiding congestion; Recovering from congestion by balancing the load, e.g. traffic engineering
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0048—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0058—Allocation criteria
    • H04L5/0064—Rate requirement of the data, e.g. scalable bandwidth, data priority
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0091—Signaling for the administration of the divided path
    • H04L5/0094—Indication of how sub-channels of the path are allocated
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0091—Signaling for the administration of the divided path
    • H04L5/0096—Indication of changes in allocation
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0091—Signaling for the administration of the divided path
    • H04L5/0096—Indication of changes in allocation
    • H04L5/0098—Signalling of the activation or deactivation of component carriers, subcarriers or frequency bands
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00—Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/02—Arrangements for optimising operational condition
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W28/00—Network traffic management; Network resource management
    • H04W28/02—Traffic management, e.g. flow control or congestion control
    • H04W28/08—Load balancing or load distribution
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/0005—Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
    • H04W36/0007—Control or signalling for completing the hand-off for multicast or broadcast services, e.g. MBMS
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/0005—Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
    • H04W36/0055—Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/08—Reselecting an access point
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/50—Allocation or scheduling criteria for wireless resources
    • H04W72/52—Allocation or scheduling criteria for wireless resources based on load
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/16—Performing reselection for specific purposes
    • H04W36/22—Performing reselection for specific purposes for handling the traffic
    • Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02D—CLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES [ICT], I.E. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES AIMING AT THE REDUCTION OF THEIR OWN ENERGY USE
    • Y02D30/00—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks
    • Y02D30/70—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks in wireless communication networks

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communication, and more specifically, to a communication method and communication device.
  • the fifth generation new radio (5G NR) communication system introduces the concepts of synchronization signal and physical broadcast channel block (synchronization signal and physical broadcast channel block, SSB).
  • the SSB is composed of a primary synchronization signal (PSS), a secondary synchronization signal (SSS), and a physical broadcast channel (PBCH). It occupies 4 symbols in the time domain and in the frequency domain. Occupies 240 subcarriers on the domain. Within the frequency range of one carrier, multiple SSBs can be transmitted, and each SSB corresponds to a physical cell identifier (PCI), and the PCIs of these SSBs can be the same or different.
  • PCI physical cell identifier
  • the above-mentioned SSB can support the terminal device to perform cell search.
  • the terminal device can obtain the starting position of the system frame based on the SSB, decode the PBCH to obtain system information, and so on.
  • the cells corresponding to different SSBs in a communication system occupy different resources, such as PCI, time-frequency resource channels, and so on.
  • the resources occupied by the cells corresponding to the SSB are very valuable. If the resources occupied by the cells corresponding to the SSBs in different network devices in the communication system can be coordinated, the cells corresponding to different SSBs can be reduced. The conflict between the occupied resources improves the performance of the entire communication system.
  • This application provides a communication method and communication device. After determining to close or activate the SSB, a network device sends a request message to other network devices to request other network devices to update the state of the SSB or activate the SSB, that is, a different network The devices can learn about the resources occupied by the cell corresponding to the SSB, so as to achieve resource coordination.
  • a communication method including: a first network device determines to close or activate a first synchronization signal and a physical broadcast channel block SSB; the first network device sends a first request message to the second network device, the first request The message carries first indication information indicating the first SSB; in the case that the first SSB is an SSB in the first network device, the first request message is used to request the second network device to update the status of the first SSB , Wherein the second network device maintains information about at least one SSB in the first network device; or, in the case that the first network device determines that the activated first SSB is one of the SSBs in the second network device, A request message is used to request the second network device to activate the first SSB, wherein the first network device maintains information about at least one SSB in the second network device.
  • the first network device after determining to close or activate the local first SSB, the first network device sends a first request message to the second network device to request the second network device to update the state of the first SSB. That is, the second network device can learn the usage of the resources occupied by the cell corresponding to the first SSB.
  • the second network device can use the part of the resources; or, the first After determining to activate the first SSB in the second network device, the network device sends a first request message to the second network device to request the second network device to activate the first SSB, that is, the second network device can use the available resources in time, thereby Realize resource coordination, and the first request message carries first indication information indicating the first SSB, so that the second network device can accurately learn which SSB needs to be updated or the first SSB that needs to be activated, which improves resource coordination. accuracy.
  • the first indication information includes at least one of the following information: identification information of the first SSB, channel bandwidth information of the cell corresponding to the first SSB, and SSB
  • the status list of the SSB where the status list of the SSB is a list of SSB status information in the network device to which the first SSB belongs, and the first SSB in the status list of the SSB is the dormant state or the active state, or the status list of the SSB is the first An SSB status list, or, the SSB status list is the status list of the remaining SSBs except the first SSB in the network equipment to which the first SSB belongs.
  • the first indication information indicating the first SSB may be a variety of optional information, which improves the flexibility of the solution.
  • the identification information of the first SSB includes: the physical cell identification of the first SSB; or, the physical cell identification of the first SSB and the radio frequency reference frequency of the first SSB; Or, the physical cell identity of the first SSB and the new wireless absolute radio frequency channel number of the first SSB; or, the physical cell identity of the first SSB, the new wireless absolute radio frequency channel number of the first SSB, and the operation of the carrier where the first SSB is located Frequency band; or, the new radio cell global identity NCGI of the first SSB; or, the identity ID of the first SSB.
  • the identification information of the first SSB can be in various forms, that is, the SSB can be identified by a variety of information, so as to provide a flexible identification scheme for identifying the SSB.
  • the channel bandwidth information of the cell corresponding to the first SSB includes at least one of the following information: physical resource blocks occupied by the channel of the cell corresponding to the first SSB PRB quantity information, transmission bandwidth and sub-carrier spacing in units of resource blocks, or the percentage of the channel bandwidth of the cell corresponding to the first SSB to the total channel bandwidth.
  • the channel bandwidth information of the cell corresponding to the first SSB can be in various forms, that is to say, the channel bandwidth of the cell corresponding to the first SSB can be indicated through various information, which is an indication
  • the channel bandwidth of the cell corresponding to the first SSB provides a flexible indication scheme.
  • the first network device shutting down or activating the first SSB includes: The load information in the first network device decides to close or activate the first SSB; or, the first network device receives the close or activate SSB instruction information, and the close or activate SSB instruction information is used to instruct the first network device to close or activate the first SSB .
  • the first network device can determine to close or activate the first SSB in the first network device through a variety of determination methods, and provide more information for how the first network device determines to close or activate the first SSB. This option increases the flexibility of how the first network device determines to close or activate the first SSB.
  • the method before the first network device turns off the first SSB, the method further includes: the first network device sends a second request message to the second network device, and the second request message Used to request the terminal device to be switched from the first network device to the second network device, wherein the second request message carries second indication information, and the reason for the terminal device to switch from the first network device to the second network device is the second indication
  • the information is used to instruct the terminal device to switch from the first network device to the second network device because the first SSB is about to close; the first network device receives the second response message sent by the second network device, and the second The response message is used to indicate the resource preparation status of the second network device for the terminal device.
  • the first network device may request to switch the terminal device in the first network device from the first network device to the second network device, wherein the second request message carries the terminal device from
  • the reason for the first network device to switch to the second network device is the second indication information that the first SSB is about to be closed, which can provide the second network device with a cause for the first network device to switch the terminal device, This allows the second network device to decide whether to receive the terminal device by one more reference factor.
  • the method further includes: the first network device receives a first response message sent by the second network device, the first response message is used to indicate whether the second network device is successfully updated The status of the first SSB.
  • the first network device can receive the first response message sent by the second network device, and can clearly learn whether the second network device successfully updates the status of the first SSB according to the first response message.
  • the first response message is used to indicate that when the second network device has not successfully updated the status of the first SSB, the first response message carries the first duration for Instruct the first network device to be able to resend the first request message after the first period of time.
  • the first response message can carry the first duration to indicate that the first network device is
  • the first request message can be re-sent after the first time period, which provides an implementation solution for the first network device to re-initiate the first request message.
  • the first network device determining that the activation of the first SSB includes: the first network device It is determined according to the load information in the first network device that the first SSB in the second network device needs to be activated; or the first network device determines that the first SSB in the second network device needs to be activated according to the coverage information of the first network device; or , The first network device receives the activation SSB indication information, and the activation SSB indication information is used to indicate activation of the first SSB.
  • the first network device can determine to activate the first SSB in the SSB in the second network device according to multiple determination methods, which is how the first network device determines to activate the first SSB in the second network device.
  • multiple determination methods which is how the first network device determines to activate the first SSB in the second network device.
  • One SSB provides multiple options to increase the flexibility of how the first network device determines to activate the first SSB.
  • the method further includes: the first network device receives a third response message sent by the second network device, the third response message is used to indicate whether the second network device is successfully activated The first SSB.
  • the first network device can receive the third response message sent by the second network device, and can clearly learn whether the second network device successfully activates the first SSB according to the third response message.
  • the method when the third response message is used to indicate that the second network device successfully activates the first SSB, the method further includes: the first network device updates the state of the first SSB.
  • the first network device locally updates the state of the first SSB.
  • maintaining the information of at least one SSB in the second network device in the first network device includes: maintaining at least one SSB in the second network device in the first network device
  • the SSB information includes: identification information of at least one SSB in the first network device maintained in the second network device, status information of at least one SSB in the first network device, and at least one cell respectively corresponding to the at least one SSB in the first network device Bandwidth information of the channel.
  • the information of the SSB in the neighbor network device maintained in the network device includes a variety of information, and the status change of the SSB can be determined in time when a certain information of the SSB changes.
  • a communication method including: a second network device receives a first request message sent by a first network device, the first request message is used to request the second network device to update the first synchronization signal and the physical broadcast channel block The status of the SSB or the activation of the first SSB, the first request message carries the first indication information indicating the first SSB; the first SSB is the situation of one SSB in the first network device that the first network device determines to shut down or activate Next, the second network device updates the status of the first SSB, where the second network device maintains information about at least one SSB in the first network device; or, the first SSB determines the activated second network for the first network device In the case of one SSB in the device, the second network device activates the first SSB, wherein the first network device maintains information about at least one SSB in the second network device.
  • the second network device can learn the SSB that needs to be activated or deactivated on the first network device side and the SSB that needs to be activated by the second network device on the first network device side according to the received first request message.
  • SSB that is, the second network device can determine which resources will be occupied by the cell corresponding to the SSB and which resources will be released by the SSB according to the received first request message.
  • the second network device and the first network device Resource coordination can be achieved between them, and the first request message carries first indication information indicating the first SSB, so that the second network device can accurately learn which SSB needs to be updated or the first SSB that needs to be activated, so as to increase resources. Accuracy of coordination.
  • the first indication information includes at least one of the following information: identification information of the first SSB, channel bandwidth information of the cell corresponding to the first SSB, and SSB information
  • the status list where the status list of the SSB is the list of SSB status information in the network device to which the first SSB belongs, and the first SSB in the status list of the SSB is the dormant state or the active status, or the status list of the SSB is the first
  • the status list of the SSB, or the status list of the SSB is the status list of the remaining SSBs except the first SSB in the network equipment to which the first SSB belongs.
  • the first indication information indicating the first SSB may be a variety of optional information, which improves the flexibility of the solution.
  • the identification information of the first SSB includes: the physical cell identification of the first SSB; or, the physical cell identification of the first SSB and the radio frequency reference frequency of the first SSB; Or, the physical cell identity of the first SSB and the new wireless absolute radio frequency channel number of the first SSB; or, the physical cell identity of the first SSB, the new wireless absolute radio frequency channel number of the first SSB, and the operation of the carrier where the first SSB is located Frequency band; or, the new radio cell global identity NCGI of the first SSB; or, the identity ID of the first SSB.
  • the identification information of the first SSB can be in various forms, that is, the SSB can be identified by a variety of information, so as to provide a flexible identification scheme for identifying the SSB.
  • the channel bandwidth information of the cell corresponding to the first SSB includes at least one of the following information: the physical resource block PRB occupied by the channel of the cell corresponding to the first SSB The percentage of the channel bandwidth of the cell corresponding to the first SSB to the total channel bandwidth, the transmission bandwidth and sub-carrier spacing in units of resource blocks, or the channel bandwidth of the cell corresponding to the first SSB.
  • the channel bandwidth information of the cell corresponding to the first SSB can be in various forms, that is to say, the channel bandwidth of the cell corresponding to the first SSB can be indicated through various information, which is an indication
  • the channel bandwidth of the cell corresponding to the first SSB provides a flexible indication scheme.
  • the second network device receives the first network device Before sending the first request message, the method further includes: the second network device receives a second request message sent by the first network device, the second request message is used to request the terminal device to be switched from the first network device to the second network device, The second request message carries second indication information, and the second indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to switch from the first network device to the second network device because the reason why the first SSB is about to be closed; The network device sends a second response message to the first network device, where the second response message is used to indicate the resource preparation status of the terminal device in the second network device.
  • the second network device can learn which terminal devices need to switch to the second network device under the premise that the first network device is about to close the first SSB according to the received second request message.
  • the second network device is provided with a reason for the first network device to switch the terminal device, so that the second network device determines whether to receive the terminal device and has an additional reference factor.
  • the method further includes: the second network device Send a first response message to the first network device, where the first response message is used to indicate whether the second network device successfully updates the status of the first SSB.
  • the second network device sends a first response message to the first network device, and the first response message is used to notify the first network device whether the second network device successfully updates the first SSB status.
  • the first response message is used to indicate that when the second network device has not successfully updated the status of the first SSB, the first response message carries the first duration for Instruct the first network device to be able to resend the first request message after the first period of time.
  • the first response message can carry the first duration to indicate that the first network device is
  • the first request message can be re-sent after the first time period, which provides an implementation solution for the first network device to re-initiate the first request message.
  • the method further includes: A network device sends a third response message, where the third response message is used to indicate whether the second network device successfully activates the first SSB.
  • the second network device sends a third response message to the first network device, and the third response message is used to notify the first network device whether the second network device successfully activates the first SSB.
  • maintaining the information of at least one SSB in the second network device in the first network device includes: maintaining at least one SSB in the second network device in the first network device The identification information of the SSB in the second network device, the status information of the SSB in the second network device, and the bandwidth information of the channel of at least one cell corresponding to at least one SSB in the second network device; the second network device maintains the information of the at least one SSB in the first network device The information includes: the identification information of at least one SSB in the first network device maintained in the second network device, the status information of at least one SSB in the first network device, and the channel of at least one cell corresponding to the at least one SSB in the first network device. Bandwidth information.
  • the information of the SSB in the neighbor network device maintained in the network device includes a variety of information, and the status change of the SSB can be determined in time when a certain information of the SSB changes.
  • a communication device which can be used to perform operations of the first network device in the first aspect and any possible implementation manner of the first aspect.
  • the communication device includes means for executing the steps or functions described in the first aspect above, which may be the first network device of the first aspect.
  • the steps or functions can be realized by software, or by hardware, or by a combination of hardware and software.
  • a communication device which can be used to perform the operation of the second network device in the second aspect and any possible implementation manner of the second aspect.
  • the communication device may include a means for executing the steps or functions described in the second aspect above, which may be the second network device of the second aspect.
  • the steps or functions can be realized by software, or by hardware, or by a combination of hardware and software.
  • a communication device including a processor, a transceiver, and a memory, where the memory is used to store a computer program, and the transceiver is used to execute any one of the possible implementations of the first or second aspects
  • the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the communication device executes the communication method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first or second aspect.
  • processors there are one or more processors and one or more memories.
  • the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory and the processor may be provided separately.
  • the transceiver includes a transmitter (transmitter) and a receiver (receiver).
  • a communication device including a transceiver, a processor, and a memory.
  • the processor is used to control the transceiver to send and receive signals
  • the memory is used to store a computer program
  • the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the communication device executes the first aspect or any possible implementation manner of the first aspect Method in.
  • a communication device including a transceiver, a processor, and a memory.
  • the processor is used to control the transceiver to send and receive signals
  • the memory is used to store a computer program
  • the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the communication device executes the second aspect or any possible implementation manner of the second aspect Method in.
  • a system in a sixth aspect, includes the communication devices provided in the third aspect and the fourth aspect.
  • a computer program product includes: a computer program (also referred to as code or instructions), which when the computer program is executed, causes the computer to execute any of the first or second aspects above.
  • a computer program also referred to as code or instructions
  • a computer-readable medium stores a computer program (also called code, or instruction) when it runs on a computer, so that the computer executes the first or second aspect above Any one of the possible implementation methods.
  • a computer program also called code, or instruction
  • a chip system including a memory and a processor, the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that a communication device installed with the chip system executes the foregoing The method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect or the second aspect.
  • a communication method including: a third network device determines to close or activate the second synchronization signal and physical broadcast channel block SSB; the third network device sends a third request message to the fourth network device, and the third request The message carries third indication information indicating the second SSB, the third request message is used to request the fourth network device to send the fourth request message to the fifth network device, and the fourth request message carries third indication information, where, The fourth network device maintains information about at least one SSB in the third network device and information about at least one SSB in the fifth network device; in the case that the second SSB is one SSB in the third network device, the fourth request message Used to request the fifth network device to update the status of the second SSB, where the fifth network device maintains information about at least one SSB in the third network device; or, the third network device determines that the activated second SSB is the fifth In the case of one SSB in the SSB in the network device, the fourth request message is
  • the third network device determines to close or activate the local second SSB, or the third network device determines to activate the second SSB of the fifth network device. And the third network device needs to notify the fifth network device of the information of turning off or activating the SSB, so that the fifth network device updates the status of the second SSB of the third network device maintained in the fifth network device, or makes the fifth network device The device activates the second SSB. In this way, resource coordination between the third network device and the fifth network device is realized, and the third request message carries third indication information indicating the second SSB, so that the fourth network device can accurately learn that the third network device needs to request the second SSB. 5.
  • the fourth request message carries third indication information indicating the second SSB, so that the fifth network device can accurately learn Which SSB is the second SSB that needs to be updated or needs to be activated, so as to improve the accuracy of resource coordination.
  • the third network device and the fifth network device cannot directly perform signaling interaction, the information needs to be forwarded through a third-party device (fourth network device). And the fourth network device does not only perform the function of forwarding information.
  • the fourth network device maintains the information of at least one SSB in the third network device and the information of at least one SSB in the fifth network device, so the fourth network device can also Perform the function of updating the status of the local SSB.
  • the third indication information includes at least one of the following information: identification information of the second SSB, channel bandwidth information of the cell corresponding to the second SSB, and SSB A status list, where the status list of the SSB is a list of SSB status information in the network device to which the second SSB belongs, and the second SSB in the status list of the SSB is the dormant state or the active status, or the status list of the SSB is the second The status list of the SSB, or the status list of the SSB is the status list of the remaining SSBs except the second SSB in the network equipment to which the second SSB belongs.
  • the third indication information indicating the second SSB may be a variety of optional information, which improves the flexibility of the solution.
  • the identification information of the second SSB includes: the physical cell identification of the second SSB; or, the physical cell identification of the second SSB and the radio frequency reference frequency of the second SSB; Or, the physical cell identity of the second SSB and the new wireless absolute radio frequency channel number of the second SSB; or, the physical cell identity of the second SSB, the new wireless absolute radio frequency channel number of the second SSB, and the operation of the carrier where the first SSB is located Frequency band; or, the new radio cell global identity NCGI of the second SSB; or, the identity ID of the second SSB.
  • the identification information of the second SSB can be in various forms, that is, the SSB can be identified by various information, and a flexible identification scheme is provided for identifying the SSB.
  • the channel bandwidth information of the cell corresponding to the second SSB includes at least one of the following information: physical resource blocks occupied by the channel of the cell corresponding to the second SSB PRB quantity information, transmission bandwidth and subcarrier spacing in units of resource blocks, or the percentage of the channel bandwidth of the cell corresponding to the second SSB to the total channel bandwidth.
  • the channel bandwidth information of the cell corresponding to the second SSB can be in various forms, that is to say, the channel bandwidth of the cell corresponding to the second SSB can be indicated by a variety of information, which is an indication
  • the channel bandwidth of the cell corresponding to the second SSB provides a flexible indication solution.
  • the third network device shuts down or activates the second SSB includes: the third network device is based on The load information in the third network device decides to close or activate the second SSB; or, the third network device receives the close or activate SSB instruction information, and the close or activate SSB instruction information is used to instruct the third network device to close or activate the second SSB .
  • the third network device can determine to close or activate the second SSB in the third network device through a variety of determination methods, and provide more information for how the third network device determines to close or activate the second SSB. This option increases the flexibility of how the third network device determines to close or activate the second SSB.
  • the method before the third network device turns off the second SSB, the method further includes: the third network device sends a fifth request message to the fourth network device, and the fifth request message Used to request the fourth network device to send a sixth request message to the fifth network device, where the fifth request message carries fourth indication information; the sixth request message is used to request to switch the terminal device from the third network device to the fifth Network device, the sixth request message carries fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to switch from the third network device to the fifth network device because the reason is the second SSB It is about to close; the third network device receives the fourth response message sent by the fourth network device, and the fourth response message is used to indicate the resource preparation status of the terminal device in the fifth network device.
  • the third network device may request to switch the terminal device in the third network device from the third network device to the fifth network device, wherein the fifth request message carries the instruction
  • the reason why the terminal device switches from the third network device to the fifth network device is the fourth indication information that the second SSB is about to close, and the fourth network device sends the fifth network device to the fifth network device according to the fifth request message.
  • the sixth request message also carries the fourth indication information, which can provide the fifth network device with a reason for the third network device to switch the terminal device, so that the fifth network device has an additional reference factor when deciding whether to receive the terminal device.
  • the method further includes: the third network device receives a fifth response message sent by the fourth network device, where the fifth response message is used to indicate whether the fourth network device is successfully updated The status of the second SSB.
  • the third network device can receive the fifth response message sent by the fourth network device, and according to the fifth response message It is clearly known whether the fourth network device successfully updates the status of the second SSB.
  • the fifth response message is used to indicate that when the fourth network device has not successfully updated the status of the second SSB, the fifth response message carries the second duration for Instruct the third network device to be able to resend the third request message after the second period of time.
  • the fifth response message can carry the second duration to indicate that the third network device is in After the second time period, the third request message can be resent, which provides an implementation solution for the third network device to re-initiate the third request message.
  • the third network device determining that activating the second SSB includes: the third network device It is determined according to the load information in the third network device that the second SSB in the fifth network device needs to be activated; or the third network device determines that the second SSB in the fifth network device needs to be activated according to the coverage information of the third network device; or , The third network device receives the activation SSB indication information, and the activation SSB indication information is used to indicate activation of the second SSB.
  • the third network device can determine to activate the second SSB in the SSB of the fifth network device according to multiple determination methods, which is how the third network device determines to activate the second SSB in the fifth network device.
  • the second SSB provides multiple options to increase the flexibility of how the third network device determines to activate the second SSB.
  • the method further includes: the third network device receives a sixth response message sent by the fourth network device, the sixth response message is used to indicate whether the fifth network device is successfully activated The second SSB.
  • the third network device can receive the sixth response message sent by the fourth network device, and can clearly learn whether the fifth network device successfully activates the second SSB according to the sixth response message.
  • the method further includes: the third network device updates the state of the second SSB.
  • the third network device locally updates the state of the second SSB.
  • maintaining information about at least one SSB in the fifth network device in the third network device includes: maintaining at least one SSB in the fifth network device in the third network device
  • the fifth network device maintains at least one of the third network devices
  • the SSB information includes: identification information of at least one SSB in the third network device maintained in the fifth network device, status information of at least one SSB in the third network device, and at least one cell respectively corresponding to the at least one SSB in the third network device Bandwidth information of the channel;
  • the fourth network device maintains information about at least one SSB in the third network device and information about at least one SSB in the fifth network device includes: the fourth network device maintains at least one of the third network
  • the information of the SSB in the neighbor network device maintained in the network device includes a variety of information, and the status change of the SSB can be determined in time when a certain information of the SSB changes.
  • a communication method including: a fourth network device receives a third request message sent by a third network device, the third request message carries third indication information indicating the second SSB, and the third request The message is used to request the fourth network device to send a fourth request message to the fifth network device; the fourth network device sends a fourth request message to the fifth network device, the fourth request message carries third indication information, and the fourth request message Used to request the fifth network device to update the status of the second synchronization signal and the physical broadcast channel block SSB or to activate the second SSB, where the fourth network device maintains information about at least one SSB in the third network device and the fifth network device Information about at least one SSB in the second SSB; in the case that the second SSB is one of the SSBs of the third network device that the third network device determines to close or activate, the fourth request message is used to request the fifth network device to update the status of the second SSB , Wherein the fifth network device maintains information about
  • the third network device determines to close or activate the local second SSB, or the third network device determines to activate the second SSB of the fifth network device. And the third network device needs to notify the fifth network device of the information of turning off or activating the SSB, so that the fifth network device updates the status of the second SSB of the third network device maintained in the fifth network device, or makes the fifth network device The device activates the second SSB. In this way, resource coordination between the third network device and the fifth network device is realized, and the third request message carries third indication information indicating the second SSB, so that the fourth network device can accurately learn that the third network device needs to request the second SSB. 5.
  • the network device update status or which SSB needs to be activated to improve the accuracy of resource coordination;
  • the fourth request message carries third indication information indicating the second SSB, so that the fifth network device can accurately learn Which SSB is the second SSB that needs to be updated or needs to be activated, so as to improve the accuracy of resource coordination.
  • the third network device and the fifth network device cannot directly perform signaling interaction, the information needs to be forwarded through a third-party device (fourth network device). And the fourth network device does not only perform the function of forwarding information.
  • the fourth network device maintains the information of at least one SSB in the third network device and the information of at least one SSB in the fifth network device, so the fourth network device can also Perform the function of updating the status of the local SSB.
  • the third indication information includes at least one of the following information:
  • the second SSB in is the dormant state or the active state, or the state list of the SSB is the state list of the second SSB, or the state list of the SSB is the SSB in the network equipment to which the second SSB belongs except the second SSB
  • the status list of the remaining SSBs is the dormant state or the active state, or the state list of the SSB is the state list of the second SSB, or the state list of the SSB is the SSB in the network equipment to which the second SSB belongs except the second SSB
  • the status list of the remaining SSBs is the dormant state or the active state, or the state list of the
  • the third indication information indicating the second SSB may be a variety of optional information, which improves the flexibility of the solution.
  • the identification information of the second SSB includes: the physical cell identification of the second SSB; or, the physical cell identification of the second SSB and the radio frequency reference of the second SSB Frequency; or, the physical cell identity of the second SSB and the new wireless absolute radio frequency channel number of the second SSB; or, the physical cell identity of the second SSB, the new wireless absolute radio frequency channel number of the second SSB, and the carrier where the first SSB is located Or, the new wireless cell global identity NCGI of the second SSB; or, the identity ID of the second SSB.
  • the identification information of the second SSB can be in various forms, that is, the SSB can be identified by various information, and a flexible identification scheme is provided for identifying the SSB.
  • the channel bandwidth information of the cell corresponding to the second SSB includes at least one of the following information: the physical occupancy of the channel of the cell corresponding to the second SSB The quantity information of the resource block PRB, the transmission bandwidth and the subcarrier interval in the unit of the resource block, or the percentage of the channel bandwidth of the cell corresponding to the second SSB to the total channel bandwidth.
  • the channel bandwidth information of the cell corresponding to the second SSB can be in various forms, that is to say, the channel bandwidth of the cell corresponding to the second SSB can be indicated by a variety of information, which is an indication
  • the channel bandwidth of the cell corresponding to the second SSB provides a flexible indication solution.
  • the fourth network device receives the third Before the third request message sent by the network device, the method further includes: the fourth network device receives a fifth request message sent by the third network device, where the fifth request message is used to request the fourth network device to send the sixth request to the fifth network device Message, wherein the fifth request message carries fourth indication information; the fourth network device sends a sixth request message to the fifth network device, and the sixth request message is used to request the terminal device to be switched from the third network device to the fifth network Device, the sixth request message carries fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to switch from the third network device to the fifth network device because the reason why the second SSB is about to Closed; the fourth network device sends a fourth response message to the third network device, and the fourth response message is used to indicate the resource preparation status of the terminal device in the fifth network
  • the third network device may request to switch the terminal device in the third network device from the third network device to the fifth network device, wherein the fifth request message carries the instruction
  • the reason why the terminal device switches from the third network device to the fifth network device is the fourth indication information that the second SSB is about to close, and the fourth network device sends the fifth network device to the fifth network device according to the fifth request message.
  • the sixth request message also carries the fourth indication information, which can provide the fifth network device with a reason for the third network device to switch the terminal device, so that the fifth network device has an additional reference factor when deciding whether to receive the terminal device.
  • the method further includes: the fourth network device updates the status of the second SSB; the fourth network device sends a fifth response message to the third network device, and the fifth The response message is used to indicate whether the fourth network device successfully updates the status of the second SSB.
  • the third network device can receive the fifth response message sent by the fourth network device, and according to the fifth response message It is clearly known whether the fourth network device successfully updates the status of the second SSB.
  • the fifth response message is used to indicate that when the fourth network device has not successfully updated the status of the second SSB, the fifth response message carries the second duration, It is used to indicate that the third network device can resend the third request message after the second period of time.
  • the fifth response message can carry the second duration to indicate that the third network device is in After the second time period, the third request message can be resent, which provides an implementation solution for the third network device to re-initiate the third request message.
  • the method further includes: a sixth response message sent by the fourth network device to the third network device, where the sixth response message is used to indicate whether the fifth network device Successfully activate the second SSB.
  • the fourth network device sends a sixth response message to the third network device, and the sixth response message is used to indicate whether the fifth network device successfully activates the second SSB.
  • maintaining the information of at least one SSB in the fifth network device in the third network device includes: maintaining at least one SSB in the fifth network device in the third network device The identification information of one SSB, the status information of at least one SSB in the fifth network device, and the bandwidth information of the channel of at least one cell corresponding to at least one SSB in the fifth network device; the fifth network device maintains the third network device
  • the information of the at least one SSB includes: the identification information of the at least one SSB in the third network device maintained in the fifth network device, the status information of the at least one SSB in the third network device, and the at least one SSB corresponding to the third network device.
  • the fourth network device maintains the information of at least one SSB in the third network device and the information of at least one SSB in the fifth network device includes: the fourth network device maintains the third network device The identification information of at least one SSB and the identification information of at least one SSB in the fifth network device, the status information of at least one SSB in the third network device, and the status information of at least one SSB in the fifth network device, and at least one of the third network devices The bandwidth information of the channel of at least one cell respectively corresponding to one SSB and the bandwidth information of the channel of at least one cell respectively corresponding to the at least one SSB in the fifth network device.
  • the information of the SSB in the neighbor network device maintained in the network device includes a variety of information, and the status change of the SSB can be determined in time when a certain information of the SSB changes.
  • a communication method receives a fourth request message sent by a fourth network device, and the fourth request message is used to request the fifth network device to update the second synchronization signal and the physical broadcast channel block SSB Or activate the second SSB, the fourth request message carries third indication information indicating the second SSB, where the fourth network device maintains the status information of at least one SSB in the third network device and the fifth network device
  • the third network device sends a third request message to the fourth network device, and the third request message carries third indication information, requesting the fourth network device to send the fourth request message to the fifth network device
  • the fifth network device updates the status of the second SSB, where the fifth network device maintains the third network Information about at least one SSB in the device; or, when the second SSB is one of the activated fifth network devices determined by the third network device, the fifth network device activates
  • the third network device determines to close or activate the local second SSB, or the third network device determines to activate the second SSB of the fifth network device. And the third network device needs to notify the fifth network device of the information of turning off or activating the SSB, so that the fifth network device updates the state of the SSB of the third network device maintained in the fifth network device, or makes the fifth network device activate SSB. In this way, resource coordination between the third network device and the fifth network device is realized, and the third request message carries third indication information indicating the second SSB, so that the fourth network device can accurately learn that the third network device needs to request the second SSB. 5.
  • the network device update status or which SSB needs to be activated to improve the accuracy of resource coordination;
  • the fourth request message carries third indication information indicating the second SSB, so that the fifth network device can accurately learn Which SSB is the second SSB that needs to be updated or needs to be activated, so as to improve the accuracy of resource coordination.
  • the third network device and the fifth network device cannot directly perform signaling interaction, the information needs to be forwarded through a third-party device (fourth network device). Moreover, the fourth network device does not only perform the function of forwarding information. The fourth network device maintains the status information of at least one SSB in the third network device and the information of at least one SSB in the fifth network device, so the fourth network device also The function of updating the status of the local SSB can be performed.
  • the third indication information includes at least one of the following information: identification information of the second SSB, channel bandwidth information of the cell corresponding to the second SSB, and The status list of the SSB, where the status list of the SSB is a list of SSB status information in the network device to which the second SSB belongs, and the second SSB in the status list of the SSB is in a dormant state or an active state, or the status list of the SSB is The status list of the second SSB, or, the status list of the SSB is the status list of the remaining SSBs except the second SSB in the network equipment to which the second SSB belongs.
  • the third indication information indicating the second SSB may be a variety of optional information, which improves the flexibility of the solution.
  • the identification information of the second SSB includes: the physical cell identification of the second SSB; or, the physical cell identification of the second SSB and the radio frequency reference of the second SSB Frequency; or, the physical cell identity of the second SSB and the new wireless absolute radio frequency channel number of the second SSB; or, the physical cell identity of the second SSB, the new wireless absolute radio frequency channel number of the second SSB, and the carrier where the first SSB is located Or, the new wireless cell global identity NCGI of the second SSB; or, the identity ID of the second SSB.
  • the identification information of the second SSB can be in various forms, that is, the SSB can be identified by various information, and a flexible identification scheme is provided for identifying the SSB.
  • the channel bandwidth information of the cell corresponding to the second SSB includes at least one of the following information: the physical size of the channel occupied by the cell corresponding to the second SSB The quantity information of the resource block PRB, the bandwidth and subcarrier spacing in the unit of the resource block, or the percentage of the channel bandwidth of the cell corresponding to the second SSB to the total channel bandwidth.
  • the channel bandwidth information of the cell corresponding to the second SSB can be in various forms, that is to say, the channel bandwidth of the cell corresponding to the second SSB can be indicated by a variety of information, which is an indication
  • the channel bandwidth of the cell corresponding to the second SSB provides a flexible indication solution.
  • the third network device may request to switch the terminal device in the third network device from the third network device to the fifth network device, wherein the fifth request message carries the instruction
  • the reason why the terminal device switches from the third network device to the fifth network device is the fourth indication information that the second SSB is about to close, and the fourth network device sends the fifth network device to the fifth network device according to the fifth request message.
  • the sixth request message also carries the fourth indication information, which can provide the fifth network device with a reason for the third network device to switch the terminal device, so that the fifth network device has an additional reference factor when deciding whether to receive the terminal device.
  • the method further includes: the fifth network device sends an eighth response message to the fourth network device, where the eighth response message is used to indicate whether the fifth network device is successful Update the status of the second SSB.
  • the fourth network device can receive the eighth response message sent by the fifth network device, and the eighth response message is used to indicate whether the fifth network device successfully updates the status of the second SSB.
  • the eighth response message is used to indicate that the fifth network device has not successfully updated the status of the second SSB, and the eighth response message carries the third duration, It is used to indicate that the fourth network device can resend the fourth request message after the third time period.
  • the eighth response message is used to indicate that the fourth network device has not successfully updated the status of the second SSB, and the eighth response message carries the third duration, which is used to indicate that the fourth network device is The fourth request message can be resent after the third time period.
  • the method further includes: a ninth response message sent by the fifth network device to the fourth network device, where the ninth response message is used to indicate whether the fifth network device Successfully activate the second SSB.
  • the fifth network device sends a ninth response message to the fourth network device, and the ninth response message is used to indicate whether the fifth network device successfully activates the second SSB.
  • maintaining the information of at least one SSB in the fifth network device in the third network device includes: maintaining at least one SSB in the fifth network device in the third network device The identification information of one SSB, the status information of at least one SSB in the fifth network device, and the bandwidth information of the channel of at least one cell corresponding to at least one SSB in the fifth network device; the fifth network device maintains the third network device
  • the information of the at least one SSB includes: the identification information of the at least one SSB in the third network device maintained in the fifth network device, the status information of the at least one SSB in the third network device, and the at least one SSB corresponding to the third network device.
  • the fourth network device maintains the information of at least one SSB in the third network device and the information of at least one SSB in the fifth network device includes: the fourth network device maintains the third network device The identification information of at least one SSB and the identification information of at least one SSB in the fifth network device, the status information of at least one SSB in the third network device, and the status information of at least one SSB in the fifth network device, and at least one of the third network devices The bandwidth information of the channel of at least one cell respectively corresponding to one SSB and the bandwidth information of the channel of at least one cell respectively corresponding to the at least one SSB in the fifth network device.
  • the information of the SSB in the neighbor network device maintained in the network device includes a variety of information, and the status change of the SSB can be determined in time when a certain information of the SSB changes.
  • a communication device which can be used to perform the operation of the third network device in the tenth aspect and any possible implementation manner of the tenth aspect.
  • the communication device includes a means for executing the steps or functions described in the tenth aspect above, which may be the third network device of the tenth aspect.
  • the steps or functions can be realized by software, or by hardware, or by a combination of hardware and software.
  • a communication device which can be used to perform the operation of the fourth network device in the eleventh aspect and any possible implementation manner of the eleventh aspect.
  • the communication device may include the corresponding means for executing the steps or functions described in the eleventh aspect, which may be the fourth network device of the eleventh aspect.
  • the steps or functions can be realized by software, or by hardware, or by a combination of hardware and software.
  • a communication device which can be used to perform operations of the fourth network device in the twelfth aspect and any possible implementation manner of the twelfth aspect.
  • the communication device may include the corresponding means for executing the steps or functions described in the twelfth aspect above, which may be the fifth network device of the twelfth aspect.
  • the steps or functions can be realized by software, or by hardware, or by a combination of hardware and software.
  • a communication device including a processor, a transceiver, and a memory, where the memory is used to store a computer program, and the transceiver is used to execute any one of the possible implementations of the tenth to twelfth aspects
  • the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the communication device executes the communication method in any one of the possible implementation modes of the tenth to twelfth aspects.
  • processors there are one or more processors and one or more memories.
  • the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory and the processor may be provided separately.
  • the transceiver includes a transmitter (transmitter) and a receiver (receiver).
  • a communication device including a transceiver, a processor, and a memory.
  • the processor is used to control the transceiver to send and receive signals
  • the memory is used to store a computer program
  • the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the communication device executes the tenth aspect or any possible implementation manner of the tenth aspect Method in.
  • a communication device including a transceiver, a processor, and a memory.
  • the processor is used to control the transceiver to send and receive signals
  • the memory is used to store a computer program
  • the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the communication device executes the eleventh aspect or any one of the eleventh aspects.
  • the method in the implementation mode is used to control the transceiver to send and receive signals
  • the memory is used to store a computer program
  • the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the communication device executes the eleventh aspect or any one of the eleventh aspects.
  • a communication device including a transceiver, a processor, and a memory.
  • the processor is used to control the transceiver to send and receive signals
  • the memory is used to store a computer program
  • the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the communication device executes any of the twelfth aspect or the twelfth aspect.
  • the method in the implementation mode is used to control the transceiver to send and receive signals
  • the memory is used to store a computer program
  • the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the communication device executes any of the twelfth aspect or the twelfth aspect.
  • a system in a seventeenth aspect, includes the communication devices provided in the thirteenth to fifteenth aspects.
  • a computer program product includes: a computer program (also called code, or instruction), which when the computer program is executed, causes the computer to execute the tenth to twelfth aspects above Any one of the possible implementation methods.
  • a computer program also called code, or instruction
  • a computer-readable medium stores a computer program (also called code, or instruction) when it runs on a computer, so that the computer executes the tenth aspect to the tenth aspect.
  • the method in any one of the possible implementation modes.
  • a chip system including a memory and a processor, the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory so that the communication device installed with the chip system executes The method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the tenth aspect to the twelfth aspect described above.
  • a communication method is provided.
  • a third network device sends a load report message to a fourth network device.
  • the load report message is used to indicate the load status of a cell corresponding to the SSB in the third network device, where:
  • the fourth network device maintains information about at least one SSB in the third network device;
  • the third network device receives the seventh request message sent by the fourth network device, and the seventh request message is used to instruct the third network device to turn off or activate the third network device. Synchronization signal and physical broadcast channel block SSB.
  • the third network device can send a load report message to the fourth network device to notify the load situation in the third network device, so that the fourth network device can be based on the load situation in the third network device Decide to activate or deactivate the third SSB in the third network device, or decide to activate or deactivate the third SSB in the fifth network device, the fifth network device is a neighbor network device of the third network device, and load balancing is implemented.
  • the load report message includes information about one or more SSBs in the third network device, and the cell load corresponding to the one or more SSBs Information, one or more SSB information is used to indicate the one or more SSB respectively.
  • the load report message includes at least one SSB information in the third network device and cell load information corresponding to the at least one SSB.
  • the SSB can be accurately determined based on the SSB information, and the load situation of the cell corresponding to the SSB is further determined according to the cell load information corresponding to the SSB.
  • the SSB information includes the identification information of the SSB.
  • SSB ID For example, SSB ID, SSB PCI, etc.
  • the SSB identifier includes: the physical cell identifier of the SSB; or, the physical cell identifier of the SSB and the radio frequency reference frequency of the SSB; or, the physical cell identifier of the SSB The cell ID and the new wireless absolute radio frequency channel number of the SSB; or, the physical cell ID of the SSB, the new radio absolute radio frequency channel number of the SSB, and the operating frequency band of the carrier where the SSB is located; or, the new radio cell global identification NCGI of the SSB; or, The identification ID of the SSB.
  • the identification information of the SSB can be in various forms, that is, the SSB can be identified by various information, and a flexible identification scheme is provided for identifying the SSB.
  • the load information includes at least one of the following information: wireless resource utilization information of the SSB, hardware load indicators of the SSB, and software load indicators of the SSB, The capacity value of the SSB and the overload status indication information of the SSB.
  • the overload status indication information of the SSB is used to indicate that the SSB is in an overload state or a non-overload state.
  • the cell load information corresponding to the SSB can take many forms, that is to say, the load situation of the cell corresponding to the SSB can be determined through a variety of information, in order to determine the cell load corresponding to the SSB The situation provides flexible solutions.
  • the seventh request message includes the fifth indication information of the third SSB
  • the fifth indication information may be at least one of the following information: The identification information of the third SSB, the channel bandwidth information of the cell corresponding to the third SSB, and the status list of the SSB, where the status list of the SSB is a list of the status information of the SSB in the third network device, and the status list of the SSB is the first
  • the third SSB is in a dormant state, or the state list of the SSB is the state list of the third SSB, or the state list of the SSB is the state list of the remaining SSBs in the third network device except the third SSB.
  • the third network device by carrying the fifth indication information indicating the third SSB in the seventh request message, the third network device can accurately learn that the fourth network device needs to instruct the third network device to shut down or activate Which SSB is the third SSB to improve the accuracy of load balancing.
  • the method further includes: the identification information of the third SSB includes: the physical cell identification of the third SSB; or, the physical cell identification of the third SSB and The radio frequency reference frequency of the third SSB; or, the physical cell identity of the third SSB and the new wireless absolute radio frequency channel number of the third SSB; or the physical cell identity of the third SSB, the new radio absolute radio frequency channel number of the third SSB, and The operating frequency band of the carrier where the first SSB is located; or, the new radio cell global identity NCGI of the third SSB; or, the identity ID of the third SSB.
  • the identification information of the third SSB may be in various forms, that is, the SSB can be identified by various information, and a flexible identification scheme is provided for identifying the SSB.
  • the channel bandwidth information of the cell corresponding to the third SSB includes at least one of the following information: the channel of the cell corresponding to the third SSB Information on the number of occupied physical resource blocks PRB, the transmission bandwidth and subcarrier spacing in units of resource blocks, or the percentage of the channel bandwidth of the cell corresponding to the third SSB to the total channel bandwidth.
  • the channel bandwidth information of the cell corresponding to the third SSB can be in various forms, that is to say, the channel bandwidth of the cell corresponding to the third SSB can be indicated by a variety of information.
  • the channel bandwidth of the cell corresponding to the third SSB provides a flexible indication scheme.
  • the method further includes: the third network device sends a seventh response message to the fourth network device, and the seventh response message is used to indicate whether the third SSB Successfully closed or activated.
  • maintaining information about at least one SSB in the third network device in the fourth network device includes: maintaining the third network device in the fourth network device The identification information of the at least one SSB in the third network device, the status information of the at least one SSB in the third network device, and the bandwidth information of the channel of at least one cell corresponding to the at least one SSB in the third network device.
  • the information of the SSB in the neighbor network device maintained in the fourth network device includes various kinds of information, and the state change of the SSB can be determined in time when certain information of the SSB changes.
  • a communication method receives a load report message sent by a third network device, and the load report message is used to indicate the load status of a cell corresponding to an SSB in the third network device, where , The fourth network device maintains information about at least one SSB in the third network device; the fourth network device sends a seventh request message to the third network device, and the seventh request message is used to instruct the third network device to turn off or activate the third network device. Synchronization signal and physical broadcast channel block SSB.
  • the fourth network device receives the load report message sent by the third network device, and learns the load status of the third network device according to the load report message, so that the fourth network device can be based on the third network
  • the load condition in the device decides to activate or deactivate the third SSB in the third network device, or decide to activate or deactivate the third SSB in the fifth network device to achieve load balancing.
  • the load report message includes information about one or more SSBs in the third network device, and cell load information corresponding to the one or more SSBs.
  • the load report message includes at least one SSB information in the third network device and cell load information corresponding to the at least one SSB.
  • the SSB can be accurately determined based on the SSB information, and the load situation of the cell corresponding to the SSB is further determined according to the cell load information corresponding to the SSB.
  • the SSB identifier includes: the physical cell identifier of the SSB; or, the physical cell identifier of the SSB and the radio frequency reference frequency of the SSB; or, the physical cell identifier of the SSB The cell ID and the new wireless absolute radio frequency channel number of the SSB; or, the physical cell ID of the SSB, the new radio absolute radio frequency channel number of the SSB, and the operating frequency band of the carrier where the SSB is located; or, the new radio cell global identification NCGI of the SSB; or, The identification ID of the SSB.
  • the identification information of the SSB can be in various forms, that is, the SSB can be identified by various information, and a flexible identification scheme is provided for identifying the SSB.
  • the load information includes at least one of the following information: wireless resource utilization information of the SSB, hardware load indicators of the SSB, and software load indicators of the SSB, The capacity value of the SSB and the overload status indication information of the SSB.
  • the overload status indication information of the SSB is used to indicate that the SSB is in an overload state or a non-overload state.
  • the cell load information corresponding to the SSB can be in various forms, that is to say, the load situation of the cell corresponding to the SSB can be determined through a variety of information to determine the cell load corresponding to the SSB The situation provides flexible solutions.
  • the seventh request message includes the fifth indication information of the third SSB
  • the fifth indication information may be at least one of the following information: The identification information of the third SSB, the channel bandwidth information of the cell corresponding to the third SSB, and the status list of the SSB, where the status list of the SSB is a list of the status information of the SSB in the third network device, and the status list of the SSB is the first
  • the third SSB is in a dormant state, or the state list of the SSB is the state list of the third SSB, or the state list of the SSB is the state list of the remaining SSBs in the third network device except the third SSB.
  • the third network device by carrying the fifth indication information indicating the third SSB in the seventh request message, the third network device can accurately learn that the fourth network device needs to instruct the third network device to shut down or activate Which SSB is the third SSB to improve the accuracy of load balancing.
  • the method further includes: the identification information of the third SSB includes: the physical cell identification of the third SSB; or, the physical cell identification of the third SSB and The radio frequency reference frequency of the third SSB; or, the physical cell identity of the third SSB and the new wireless absolute radio frequency channel number of the third SSB; or the physical cell identity of the third SSB, the new radio absolute radio frequency channel number of the third SSB, and The operating frequency band of the carrier where the first SSB is located; or, the new radio cell global identity NCGI of the third SSB; or, the identity ID of the third SSB.
  • the identification information of the third SSB may be in various forms, that is, the SSB can be identified by various information, and a flexible identification scheme is provided for identifying the SSB.
  • the channel bandwidth information of the cell corresponding to the third SSB includes at least one of the following information: the channel of the cell corresponding to the third SSB Information on the number of occupied physical resource blocks PRB, the transmission bandwidth and subcarrier spacing in units of resource blocks, or the percentage of the channel bandwidth of the cell corresponding to the third SSB to the total channel bandwidth.
  • the channel bandwidth information of the cell corresponding to the third SSB can be in various forms, that is to say, the channel bandwidth of the cell corresponding to the third SSB can be indicated by a variety of information.
  • the channel bandwidth of the cell corresponding to the third SSB provides a flexible indication scheme.
  • the method further includes: the third network device sends a seventh response message to the fourth network device, and the seventh response message is used to indicate whether the third SSB Successfully closed or activated.
  • maintaining information about at least one SSB in the third network device in the fourth network device includes: maintaining the third network device in the fourth network device The identification information of the at least one SSB in the third network device, the status information of the at least one SSB in the third network device, and the bandwidth information of the channel of at least one cell corresponding to the at least one SSB in the third network device.
  • the information of maintaining at least one SSB in the neighboring network device in the fourth network device includes a variety of information, and the status change of the SSB can be determined in time when a certain information of the SSB changes.
  • a communication device which can be used to perform operations of the third network device in the twenty-first aspect and any possible implementation manner of the twenty-first aspect.
  • the communication device includes means for executing the steps or functions described in the above-mentioned twenty-first aspect, which may be the third network device of the twenty-first aspect.
  • the steps or functions can be realized by software, or by hardware, or by a combination of hardware and software.
  • a communication device which can be used to perform operations of the fourth network device in the twenty-second aspect and any possible implementation manner of the twenty-second aspect.
  • the communication device may include a means for executing the steps or functions described in the 22nd aspect above, and the corresponding means may be the fourth network device of the 22nd aspect.
  • the steps or functions can be realized by software, or by hardware, or by a combination of hardware and software.
  • a communication device including a processor, a transceiver, and a memory, where the memory is used to store a computer program, and the transceiver is used to execute any of the twenty-first or twenty-second aspects.
  • the transceiver step in the communication method the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the communication device executes any one of the twenty-first or twenty-second possible implementation manners Communication method in.
  • processors there are one or more processors and one or more memories.
  • the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory and the processor may be provided separately.
  • the transceiver includes a transmitter (transmitter) and a receiver (receiver).
  • a communication device including a transceiver, a processor, and a memory.
  • the processor is used to control the transceiver to send and receive signals
  • the memory is used to store a computer program
  • the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the communication device executes any of the twenty-first aspect or the twenty-first aspect One of the possible implementation methods.
  • a communication device including a transceiver, a processor, and a memory.
  • the processor is used to control the transceiver to send and receive signals
  • the memory is used to store a computer program
  • the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the communication device executes the twenty-second aspect or any one of the twenty-second aspect.
  • a system in a twenty-sixth aspect, includes the communication device provided in the twenty-third or twenty-fourth aspect.
  • a computer program product includes: a computer program (also referred to as code or instructions), which when the computer program is executed, causes the computer to execute the twenty-first or second The method in any one of the possible implementations of the twelve aspects.
  • a computer-readable medium stores a computer program (also called code, or instruction) when it runs on a computer, so that the computer executes the twenty-first or The method in any possible implementation of the twenty-second aspect.
  • a computer program also called code, or instruction
  • a chip system including a memory and a processor, the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that a communication device equipped with the chip system Perform the method in any one of the possible implementations of the twenty-first or twenty-second aspects above.
  • a communication method including: a first network device sends a second request message to a second network device, the second request message is used to request the terminal device to be switched from the first network device to the second network device , Wherein the second request message carries second indication information, the second indication information is used to indicate that the first synchronization signal and the physical broadcast channel block SSB in the first network device are about to be closed, and the second network device maintains the first Information about at least one SSB in the network device; the first network device receives a second response message sent by the second network device, and the second response message is used to indicate the resource preparation status of the terminal device in the second network device.
  • the first network device may request to switch the terminal device in the first network device from the first network device to the second network device, wherein the second request message carries the terminal device from
  • the reason for the first network device to switch to the second network device is the second indication information that the first SSB is about to close, which can provide the second network device with the reason for the first network device to switch the terminal device, so that the second There is one more reference factor when the network device decides whether to receive the terminal device.
  • the method further includes: the first network device turns off the first SSB; the first network device sends a first request message to the second network device, and the first request message Used to request the second network device to update the status of the first SSB, the first request message carries first indication information indicating the first SSB; wherein the second network device maintains at least one SSB in the first network device Information.
  • the first network device after determining to close the local first SSB, the first network device sends a first request message to the second network device to request the second network device to update the state of the first SSB. That is, the second network device can learn the usage of the resources occupied by the cell corresponding to the first SSB. If the resources occupied by the cell corresponding to the first SSB are released, the second network device can use the part of the resources, and the first request The message carries the first indication information indicating the first SSB, so that the second network device can accurately know which SSB is the first SSB that needs to be updated or needs to be activated, thereby improving the accuracy of resource coordination.
  • the first indication information indicating the first SSB may be a variety of optional information, which improves the flexibility of the solution.
  • the identification information of the first SSB includes: the physical cell identification of the first SSB; or, the physical cell identification of the first SSB and the radio frequency reference of the first SSB Frequency; or, the physical cell identity of the first SSB and the new wireless absolute radio frequency channel number of the first SSB; or, the physical cell identity of the first SSB, the new wireless absolute radio frequency channel number of the first SSB, and the carrier where the first SSB is located Or, the new radio cell global identity NCGI of the first SSB; or, the identity ID of the first SSB.
  • the identification information of the first SSB can be in various forms, that is, the SSB can be identified by a variety of information, so as to provide a flexible identification scheme for identifying the SSB.
  • the channel bandwidth information of the cell corresponding to the first SSB includes at least one of the following information: the physical size of the channel occupied by the cell corresponding to the first SSB The quantity information of the resource block PRB, the transmission bandwidth and the subcarrier interval in the unit of the resource block, or the channel bandwidth of the cell corresponding to the first SSB as a percentage of the total channel bandwidth.
  • the channel bandwidth information of the cell corresponding to the first SSB can be in various forms, that is to say, the channel bandwidth of the cell corresponding to the first SSB can be indicated through various information, which is an indication
  • the channel bandwidth of the cell corresponding to the first SSB provides a flexible indication scheme.
  • the method further includes: the first network device receives a first response message sent by the second network device, and the first response message is used to indicate whether the second network device The status of the first SSB was successfully updated.
  • the first network device can receive the first response message sent by the second network device, and according to the first response message, it is clear whether the second network device successfully updates the status of the first SSB.
  • the first response message is used to indicate that when the second network device has not successfully updated the status of the first SSB, the first response message carries the first duration, It is used to indicate that the first network device can resend the first request message after the first period of time.
  • the first response message can carry the first duration to indicate that the first network device is
  • the first request message can be re-sent after the first time period, which provides an implementation solution for the first network device to re-initiate the first request message.
  • maintaining the information of at least one SSB in the first network device in the second network device includes: maintaining at least one SSB in the first network device in the second network device The identification information of one SSB, the state information of at least one SSB in the first network device, and the bandwidth information of the channel of at least one cell corresponding to the at least one SSB in the first network device.
  • a communication method including: a second network device receives a second request message sent by a first network device, and the second request message is used to request to switch a terminal device from the first network device to the second network device.
  • a network device where the second request message carries second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate that the first synchronization signal and the physical broadcast channel block SSB in the first network device are about to be closed, and the second network device maintains Information about at least one SSB in the first network device; the second network device sends a second response message to the first network device, and the second response message is used to indicate the resource preparation status of the terminal device in the second network device.
  • the first network device may request to switch the terminal device in the first network device from the first network device to the second network device, wherein the second request message carries the terminal device from
  • the reason for the first network device to switch to the second network device is the second indication information that the first SSB is about to close, which can provide the second network device with the reason for the first network device to switch the terminal device, so that the second There is one more reference factor when the network device decides whether to receive the terminal device.
  • the method further includes: the second network device receives a first request message sent by the first network device, and the first request message carries the instruction The first indication information of the first SSB; the first request message is used to request the second network device to update the status of the first SSB, wherein the second network device maintains information about at least one SSB in the first network device.
  • the first network device after determining to close the local first SSB, the first network device sends a first request message to the second network device to request the second network device to update the state of the first SSB. That is, the second network device can learn the usage of the resources occupied by the cell corresponding to the first SSB. If the resources occupied by the cell corresponding to the first SSB are released, the second network device can use the part of the resources, and the first request The message carries the first indication information indicating the first SSB, so that the second network device can accurately know which SSB is the first SSB that needs to be updated or needs to be activated, thereby improving the accuracy of resource coordination.
  • the first request message carries first indication information indicating the first SSB
  • the first indication information includes at least one of the following information: The identification information of the first SSB, the channel bandwidth information of the cell corresponding to the first SSB, and the status list of the SSB, where the status list of the SSB is a list of SSB status information in the network device to which the first SSB belongs, and the status list of the SSB
  • the first SSB in is the dormant state or the active state
  • the state list of the SSB is the state list of the first SSB
  • the state list of the SSB is the SSB of the network equipment to which the first SSB belongs except the first SSB
  • the status list of the remaining SSBs is the dormant state or the active state, or the state list of the SSB is the state list of the first SSB, or the state list of the SSB is the SSB of the network equipment to which the first SSB belongs except the first
  • the first indication information indicating the first SSB may be a variety of optional information, which improves the flexibility of the solution.
  • the identification information of the first SSB includes: the physical cell identification of the first SSB; or, the physical cell identification of the first SSB and the first SSB Radio frequency reference frequency; or, the physical cell identity of the first SSB and the new wireless absolute radio frequency channel number of the first SSB; or, the physical cell identity of the first SSB, the new wireless absolute radio frequency channel number of the first SSB, and the location of the first SSB
  • the operating frequency band of the carrier or, the new radio cell global identity NCGI of the first SSB; or, the identity ID of the first SSB.
  • the identification information of the first SSB can be in various forms, that is, the SSB can be identified by a variety of information, so as to provide a flexible identification scheme for identifying the SSB.
  • the channel bandwidth information of the cell corresponding to the first SSB can be in various forms, that is to say, the channel bandwidth of the cell corresponding to the first SSB can be indicated through various information, which is an indication
  • the channel bandwidth of the cell corresponding to the first SSB provides a flexible indication scheme.
  • the method further includes: the second network device sends a first response message to the first network device, and the first response message is used to instruct the second network device Whether to update the status of the first SSB successfully.
  • the first response message is used to indicate that when the second network device has not successfully updated the status of the first SSB, the first response message carries the first
  • the duration is used to indicate that the first network device can resend the first request message after the first duration.
  • the first response message can carry the first duration to indicate that the first network device is
  • the first request message can be re-sent after the first time period, which provides an implementation solution for the first network device to re-initiate the first request message.
  • the information of at least one SSB in the second network device that maintains the neighboring network device includes a variety of information, and the status change of the SSB can be determined in time when certain information of the SSB changes.
  • a communication device which may be used to perform operations of the first network device in the thirtieth aspect and any possible implementation manner of the thirtieth aspect.
  • the communication device includes means for executing the steps or functions described in the thirtieth aspect above, which may be the first network device of the first aspect.
  • the steps or functions can be realized by software, or by hardware, or by a combination of hardware and software.
  • a communication device including a processor, a transceiver, and a memory
  • the memory is used to store a computer program
  • the transceiver is used to execute any one of the thirtieth or thirty-first aspects
  • the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the communication device executes any one of the thirtieth or thirty-first aspects in any one of the possible implementations. Communication method.
  • processors there are one or more processors and one or more memories.
  • the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory and the processor may be provided separately.
  • the transceiver includes a transmitter (transmitter) and a receiver (receiver).
  • a communication device including a transceiver, a processor, and a memory.
  • the processor is used to control the transceiver to send and receive signals
  • the memory is used to store a computer program
  • the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the communication device executes any one of the thirtieth aspect or the thirtieth aspect.
  • the method in the implementation mode is used to control the transceiver to send and receive signals
  • the memory is used to store a computer program
  • the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the communication device executes any one of the thirtieth aspect or the thirtieth aspect.
  • a communication device including a transceiver, a processor, and a memory.
  • the processor is used to control the transceiver to send and receive signals
  • the memory is used to store a computer program
  • the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the communication device executes any one of the thirty-first aspect or the thirty-first aspect One of the possible implementation methods.
  • a system in a thirty-fifth aspect, includes the communication device provided in the thirty-second aspect and the thirty-third aspect.
  • a computer program product includes: a computer program (also called code, or instruction), when the computer program is executed, the computer executes the thirtieth aspect or the third aspect.
  • the method in any one of the eleven possible implementations.
  • a computer-readable medium stores a computer program (also referred to as code, or instructions) when it runs on a computer to enable the computer to execute the thirtieth aspect or A method in any possible implementation of the thirty-first aspect.
  • a computer program also referred to as code, or instructions
  • a chip system including a memory and a processor, the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that a communication device equipped with the chip system Implement the method in any one of the above-mentioned thirtieth aspect or the thirty-first aspect.
  • the first network device after determining to close or activate the first synchronization signal and physical broadcast channel block SSB, the first network device sends a first request message to the second network device to request the second network device to update the second network device.
  • the status of an SSB or the activation of the first SSB enables the second network device to clearly know the resource occupation of the SSB, thereby realizing resource coordination between the first network device and the second network device.
  • Fig. 1 is a schematic block diagram of a communication system suitable for an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 2 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 3 is a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of the communication device 10 proposed in this application.
  • Fig. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of a first network device 40 suitable for an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of the communication device 20 proposed in this application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a second network device 50 applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of the communication device 30 proposed in this application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of a third network device 60 applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of the communication device 70 proposed in this application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a fourth network device 80 applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of the communication device 90 proposed in this application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of a fifth network device 100 applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • LTE long term evolution
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • UMTS universal mobile telecommunication system
  • WiMAX worldwide interoperability for microwave access
  • 5G future 5th generation
  • NR new wireless
  • the network equipment in the embodiments of the present application may be equipment for communicating with terminal equipment.
  • the network equipment may be an evolved NodeB (eNB or eNodeB) in an LTE system, or a cloud radio access network (cloud wireless access network).
  • Radio access network (CRAN) scenario wireless controller or the network equipment can be relay station, access point, in-vehicle equipment, wearable equipment, network equipment in the future 5G network or network equipment in the future evolved PLMN network, etc.
  • CRAN Radio access network
  • the network device includes a hardware layer, an operating system layer running on the hardware layer, and an application layer running on the operating system layer.
  • the hardware layer includes hardware such as a central processing unit (CPU), a memory management unit (MMU), and memory (also referred to as main memory).
  • the operating system may be any one or more computer operating systems that implement business processing through processes, for example, Linux operating system, Unix operating system, Android operating system, iOS operating system, or windows operating system.
  • the application layer includes applications such as browsers, address books, word processing software, and instant messaging software.
  • the embodiments of the application do not specifically limit the specific structure of the execution subject of the methods provided in the embodiments of the application, as long as the program that records the codes of the methods provided in the embodiments of the application can be provided according to the embodiments of the application.
  • the execution subject of the method provided in the embodiment of the present application may be a terminal device or a network device, or a functional module in the terminal device or network device that can call and execute the program.
  • various aspects or features of the present application can be implemented as methods, devices, or products using standard programming and/or engineering techniques.
  • article of manufacture encompasses a computer program accessible from any computer-readable device, carrier, or medium.
  • computer-readable media may include, but are not limited to: magnetic storage devices (for example, hard disks, floppy disks, or tapes, etc.), optical disks (for example, compact discs (CD), digital versatile discs (DVD)) Etc.), smart cards and flash memory devices (for example, erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), cards, sticks or key drives, etc.).
  • various storage media described herein may represent one or more devices and/or other machine-readable media for storing information.
  • Fig. 1 is a schematic block diagram of a communication system suitable for an embodiment of the present application. Including core network equipment, wireless access network equipment, and centralized units and distributed units in wireless access network equipment.
  • the core network equipment shown in FIG. 1 in the embodiments of the present application may be core network equipment in different communication systems.
  • the radio access network equipment mainly includes two network equipment (network equipment #1 and network equipment #2 as shown in FIG. 1).
  • network device #1 in FIG. 1 may be a base station (gNodeB, gNB) or (ng-eNodeB, ng-eNB); network device #2 may also be a gNB or ng-eNB.
  • gNB provides NR user plane and control plane protocols and functions for terminal devices
  • ng-eNB provides terminal devices with evolved universal terrestrial radio access (E-UTRA) user plane and control plane protocols and functions.
  • E-UTRA evolved universal terrestrial radio access
  • the interfaces between gNB and gNB, between gNB and ng-eNB, and between ng-eNB and gNB are all Xn interfaces; the interfaces between radio access network equipment and core network equipment are called NG interfaces.
  • the gNB or ng-eNB may be composed of a centralized unit (CU) and a distributed unit (DU).
  • one radio access network device may include one centralized unit and multiple distributed units (distributed unit #1 and distributed unit #2 as shown in FIG. 1).
  • the CU device handles the wireless high-level protocol stack function.
  • the radio resource control (RRC) layer, the packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer, etc. can even support the sinking of some core network functions to the access network, which is called edge computing network. It can meet the higher requirements of future communication networks for new services (for example, video, online shopping, virtual/augmented reality) for network delay, and it is precisely because of the changes in communication network elements and structure that the protocol stack will be adjusted and changed accordingly Therefore, for the naming of next-generation networks, 5G NR also vividly illustrates the disruptive changes in the future 5G network itself.
  • CU covers the high-level protocol stack of the radio access network and part of the core network functions.
  • the main protocol layers involved include RRC functions, service discovery application protocol (service discovery application protocol, SDAP), packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) Sub-layer functions, while DU covers the physical layer of baseband processing and part of layer 2 functions.
  • DU implements radio frequency processing functions, radio link control (RLC), medium access control (medium access control, MAC ) And baseband processing functions such as the physical layer (PHY).
  • RLC radio link control
  • MAC medium access control
  • PHY physical layer
  • the CU can be deployed in a centralized manner. The deployment of the DU depends on the actual network environment.
  • the core urban area has high traffic density, small distance between stations, and areas with limited computer room resources, such as universities and large performance venues.
  • the DU can also be deployed in a centralized manner.
  • areas such as sparse traffic and large distance between stations, such as suburban counties and mountainous areas, DU can be deployed in a distributed manner.
  • FIG. 1 is only a schematic scene diagram.
  • the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application can be applied to resource coordination between network device #1 and network device #2 shown in FIG. 1 and between multiple distributed units in network device #2 shown in FIG. In addition to resource coordination, it can also be applied to resource coordination among other network devices, which will not be illustrated here.
  • the SSB involved in this application is composed of PSS, SSS and PBCH.
  • the SSB occupies 4 symbols in the time domain and 240 subcarriers in the frequency domain.
  • terminal equipment can obtain physical layer cell identification (identify, ID) and time slot synchronization through PSS, and terminal equipment can obtain cyclic prefix (CP) length, physical cell group ID, and frame synchronization through SSS.
  • PBCH can obtain master information block (MIB), including the number of common antenna ports, system frame number (SFN), downlink system bandwidth, and physical hybrid automatic repeat request indicator channel , PHICH) configuration information.
  • MIB master information block
  • SFN system frame number
  • PHICH physical hybrid automatic repeat request indicator channel
  • an SSB when an SSB is associated with remaining minimum system information (RMSI), the SSB corresponds to a separate cell, and the cell has a unique NR cell global identifier (NCGI). At this time, this SSB is called a cell defining SSB (cell defining SSB, CD-SSB). Only the CD-SSB can send master information block (MIB) messages and system information block 1 (system information block, SIB1) messages, and when the UE performs cell selection, it is only accessed based on the synchronization signal of the CD-SSB. Other SSBs can only send MIB messages, not SIB1 messages.
  • MIB master information block
  • SIB1 system information block
  • this application does not limit what type of SSB the SSB is, including the aforementioned CD-SSB and non-CD-SSB SSB. From the above, it can be seen that SSB is of great significance in the cell search process of terminal equipment. For a communication system, the resources occupied by the cell corresponding to SSB are very valuable. If the cell corresponding to SSB can be realized between different network equipment The occupied resources are coordinated, thereby reducing the conflict of occupied resources between the cells corresponding to different SSBs, and improving the performance of the entire communication system. Therefore, how to coordinate the resources occupied by the cell corresponding to the SSB has become an urgent problem to be solved, which will be described in detail when the specific embodiments of the present application are introduced below.
  • SSB information is used by one network device to indicate to another network device that a certain local SSB status has changed; or, for one network device to indicate to another network device one or some SSBs of the other network device Need to activate.
  • SSB information is an important contribution of this application. The following describes the specific manifestations of the SSB information in detail in the form of examples:
  • the SSB information may display a certain SSB or some SSBs.
  • the display indication method includes directly indicating the ID of the SSB.
  • the network device #1 includes 10 SSBs (SSB#1 ⁇ SSB#10), and the relative identities of the 10 SSBs in the network device #1 are ID#1 ⁇ ID#10, respectively. If the network device #1 needs to indicate to the network device #2 that the SSB#1 of the 10 SSBs is updated from the active state to the dormant state, the SSB information sent by the network device #1 to the network device #2 may be ID#1.
  • the SSB information may indirectly indicate one or some SSBs.
  • the indirect indication method includes implicitly indicating the PCI of one or some SSBs. It can be understood that, since each SSB corresponds to a PCI, indicating the PCI of one SSB, the SSB can be determined indirectly.
  • the network device #1 includes 10 SSBs (SSB#1 ⁇ SSB#10), and the PCIs of the cells corresponding to the 10 SSBs are PCI#1 ⁇ PCI#10, respectively. If the network device #1 needs to indicate to the network device #2 that the SSB#1 of the 10 SSBs is updated from the active state to the dormant state, the SSB information sent by the network device #1 to the network device #2 may be PCI#1.
  • each SSB corresponds to one PCI
  • the PCIs of the cells corresponding to multiple SSBs may be the same or different.
  • this application mainly addresses the situation where the PCI of the cell corresponding to each SSB is different.
  • the SSB information may indirectly indicate one or some SSBs.
  • the indirect indication method includes implicitly indicating the reference frequencies (RF) of a certain SSB or certain SSBs. It can be understood that since each SSB corresponds to a radio frequency reference frequency, the radio frequency reference frequency of the SSB is used to identify the location of the SSB, that is, the frequency point of the SSB. Specifically, the radio frequency reference frequency can be indicated by the NR absolute radio frequency channel number.
  • the network device #1 includes 10 SSBs (SSB#1 ⁇ SSB#10), and the RFs corresponding to the 10 SSBs are RF#1 ⁇ RF#10, respectively. If network device #1 needs to indicate to network device #2 that SSB#1 of the 10 SSBs is updated from the active state to the dormant state, the SSB information sent by network device #1 to network device #2 may be RF#1.
  • SSB NR absolute radio frequency channel number (NR absolute radio frequency channel number, NR-ARFCN).
  • the radio frequency reference frequency mentioned in 3) can be indicated by the NR absolute radio frequency channel number, that is, when the SSB information is the radio frequency reference frequency of the SSB, it can also be understood as the NR absolute radio frequency channel number of the SSB. Specifically, when the NR absolute radio frequency channel number of the SSB indicates the SSB, it is similar to the radio frequency reference frequency indicator SSB of the SSB described in 3) above, and will not be repeated here.
  • the SSB information may indirectly indicate one or some SSBs.
  • the indirect indication method includes implicitly indicating the operating frequency band of the carrier where one or some SSBs are located. It can be understood that since each SSB has a corresponding carrier operating frequency band, indicating the operating frequency band of the carrier where an SSB is located, the SSB can be determined indirectly.
  • the network device #1 includes 10 SSBs (SSB#1 ⁇ SSB#10), and the working frequency bands of the carriers where the 10 SSBs are located are working frequency band #1 to working frequency band #10, respectively.
  • the SSB information sent by the network device #1 to the network device #2 may be the working frequency band #1.
  • multiple SSBs can be transmitted within the frequency range of one carrier.
  • the SSB information only includes the working frequency band of the carrier where the SSB is located, this application mainly focuses on the situation where the working frequency band corresponding to each SSB is different.
  • CD-SSB corresponds to a single cell, and the cell has a unique NCGI.
  • SSB information can indirectly indicate one or some CD-SSB.
  • the indirect indication method includes implicitly indicating the NCGI of one or some CD-SSBs. It can be understood that since each CD-SSB has a corresponding NCGI, indicating the NCGI of an SSB, the SSB can be determined indirectly.
  • the network device #1 includes 10 SSBs (SSB#1 ⁇ SSB#10), and the NCGIs of the 10 SSBs are NCGI#1 ⁇ NCGI#10, respectively. If network device #1 needs to indicate to network device #2 that SSB#1 of the 10 SSBs is updated from an active state to a dormant state, the SSB information sent by network device #1 to network device #2 may be NCGI#1.
  • the SSB information may indirectly indicate channel bandwidth information of a cell corresponding to a certain SSB or certain SSBs.
  • the number of PRBs occupied by the channel of the cell corresponding to the SSB can be used to identify the channel bandwidth of the cell corresponding to the SSB. Therefore, the SSB information may be the number of PRBs occupied by the channel of the cell corresponding to the SSB.
  • the network device #1 includes 10 SSBs (SSB#1 to SSB#10), and the numbers of PRBs occupied by the channels of the 10 cells corresponding to the 10 SSBs are PRB#1 to PRB#10, respectively. If network device #1 needs to indicate to network device #2 that SSB#1 of the 10 SSBs is updated from an active state to a dormant state, the SSB information sent by network device #1 to network device #2 may be PRB#1.
  • the SSB information may indirectly indicate channel bandwidth information of a cell corresponding to a certain SSB or certain SSBs.
  • the channel bandwidth of the cell corresponding to the SSB can be expressed in terms of transmission bandwidth and subcarrier spacing in units of resource blocks. Therefore, the SSB information can be the transmission bandwidth and subcarrier spacing in units of resource blocks.
  • network device #1 includes 10 SSBs (SSB#1 ⁇ SSB#10), and the channel bandwidths of the 10 cells corresponding to these 10 SSBs are respectively used for the transmission bandwidth and the subcarrier interval 1 ⁇ 10 means. If the network device #1 needs to indicate to the network device #2 that the SSB#1 of the 10 SSBs is updated from the active state to the dormant state, the SSB information sent by the network device #1 to the network device #2 may be 1.
  • the SSB information may indirectly indicate channel bandwidth information of a cell corresponding to a certain SSB or certain SSBs.
  • the channel bandwidth of the cell corresponding to the SSB can be expressed as a percentage of the total channel bandwidth. Therefore, the SSB information can be the percentage of the channel bandwidth of the cell corresponding to the SSB to the total channel bandwidth.
  • the network device #1 includes 10 SSBs (SSB#1 ⁇ SSB#10), and the channel bandwidths of the 10 cells corresponding to the 10 SSBs respectively account for 1%-10% of the total channel bandwidth.
  • the SSB information sent by the network device #1 to the network device #2 may be 1%.
  • the total channel bandwidth is a preset value.
  • the SSB information may directly indicate the status of a certain SSB or some SSBs in the list of SSB status information.
  • SSB#1 belongs to network device #1, and the network device #1 includes a total of 10 SSBs (SSB#1 ⁇ SSB#10).
  • the status information of these 10 SSBs can be active or inactive. , Or dormant) status. If network device #1 needs to indicate to network device #2 that SSB #1 of the 10 SSBs is updated from the active state to the dormant state, the SSB information sent by network device #1 to network device #2 can be the one in network device #1 A list of SSB status information, and the status of SSB#1 is marked as dormant in the list.
  • the list of SSB status information in the network device #1 is as shown in Table 1 below.
  • the state information of at least one SSB in network device #1 maintained in network device #2 is as shown in the table 1 shown.
  • the SSB information sent by network device #1 to network device #2 can be a list of SSB status information in network device #1, and the status of SSB #1 is marked in the list as the dormant state as shown in Table 2 below .
  • the network device #2 may determine that the SSB#1 in the network device #1 is updated from the active state to the dormant state based on the received Table 2.
  • the SSB information may directly indicate the status of one or some SSBs.
  • SSB#1 belongs to network device #1, and the network device #1 includes a total of 10 SSBs (SSB#1 ⁇ SSB#10), and the status information of these 10 SSBs may be active or dormant. If network device #1 needs to indicate to network device #2 that SSB #1 of the 10 SSBs is updated from the active state to the dormant state, the SSB information sent by network device #1 to network device #2 may be the SSB in network device #1 #1's status.
  • the list of SSB state information in the network device #1 is as shown in Table 1 above. Then, before network device #1 instructs network device #2 to update SSB #1 of the 10 SSBs from the active state to the dormant state, the status information of at least one SSB in network device #1 maintained in network device #2 is shown in the table 1 shown.
  • the SSB information sent by the network device #1 to the network device #2 may be the state of the SSB#1 in the network device #1 as shown in Table 3 below.
  • the network device #2 may determine that SSB#1 in the network device #1 is updated from the active state to the dormant state based on the received Table 3.
  • the SSB information may indirectly indicate the status of one or some SSBs.
  • SSB#1 belongs to network device #1, and the network device #1 includes a total of 10 SSBs (SSB#1 ⁇ SSB#10), and the status information of these 10 SSBs may be active or dormant. If network device #1 needs to indicate to network device #2 that SSB #1 of the 10 SSBs is updated from the active state to the dormant state, the SSB information sent by network device #1 to network device #2 can be the same as that of network device #1.
  • the list of SSB state information in the network device #1 is as shown in Table 1 above. Then, before network device #1 instructs network device #2 to update SSB#1 in the 10 SSBs from the active state to the dormant state, the state information of at least one SSB in network device #1 maintained in network device #2 is as shown in the table 1 shown.
  • the SSB information sent by the network device #1 to the network device #2 may be that the states of the SSB#2 to SSB#9 in the network device #1 except the SSB#1 are as shown in Table 4 below.
  • the network device #2 may determine that the SSB#1 in the network device #1 is updated from the active state to the dormant state based on the received Table 4 and the maintained Table 1.
  • each SSB information is mainly used to identify SSB from the definition, so the 6 types of SSB information shown in 1) ⁇ 6) can be collectively referred to as SSB The identification information. It should be understood that there are other identification information that can identify the SSB.
  • the identification information of the six SSBs described in 1) to 6) is only an example, and cannot limit the protection scope of this application. Other identification information that can identify the SSB is also in this application.
  • 7) ⁇ 9) by definition are mainly used to indicate the channel bandwidth of the cell corresponding to the SSB, so the 3 types of SSB information shown in 7) ⁇ 9) can be collectively referred to as the corresponding SSB Channel bandwidth information of the cell. It should be understood that there are other information that can indicate the channel bandwidth of the cell corresponding to the SSB.
  • the above-mentioned 7)-9) 3 types of information indicating the channel bandwidth of the cell corresponding to the SSB are only examples, and cannot limit the protection of this application.
  • Scope other information that can indicate the channel bandwidth of the cell corresponding to the SSB is also within the protection scope of this application; among them, 10)-12) are mainly used to indicate the status of the SSB from the definition, so 10)-12)
  • the three types of SSB information shown can be collectively referred to as the status list of the SSB. It should be understood that there are other information that can be used to indicate the status of the SSB.
  • the above three types of information used to indicate the status of the SSB from 10) to 12) are only examples and cannot limit the scope of protection of this application. Others can be used for Information indicating the status of the SSB is also within the protection scope of this application.
  • the specific examples provided cannot limit the scope of protection of this application.
  • the number of SSBs in network device #1 involved in the above example may not be 10, and the number of SSBs whose status changes in network device #1 may not be 1, or it may be SSB#1, SSB, or not. It can be used to indicate the SSB that needs to be activated in network device #2.
  • the specific SSB information is as described in 1)-12) above, and will not be repeated here.
  • the SSB information can be any one of the above 1) to 12), or the SSB information can be any combination of two or more of the above 1) to 12). Since there are many possible forms of SSB, I will not list them all here.
  • the deactivate SSB (deactivate SSB, or switch off SSB) involved in this application refers to the transition of a certain SSB from an activated state to a dormant state.
  • the SSB in the active state only means that the cell corresponding to the SSB can be used to receive and/or send data, and the SSB corresponding to the cell that can be used to receive and/or send data is called the active state is just an example.
  • SSB is dormant state only means that the cell corresponding to the SSB cannot be used for receiving and/or sending data at the current moment, and the current moment cannot be used for receiving and/or sending
  • the SSB corresponding to the data cell is called the dormant state, which is just an example. It can also be called the inactive state, etc. That is to say, the focus of this application is not how to call the states of different SSBs. It can be the state of the prior art. Any name may also be a possible name in future technology, and this application does not limit it.
  • the activate SSB (activate SSB, or switch on SSB) involved in this application refers to the transition of a certain SSB from a dormant state to an activated state.
  • the SSB load information involved in this application may refer to the radio resource utilization information of the cell corresponding to the SSB, for example: uplink/downlink guaranteed bit rate physical resource block (uplink/downlink guaranteed bit rate physical resource block, UL/DL GBR PRB) utilization, uplink/downlink non-guaranteed bit rate physical resource block (uplink/downlink non-guaranteed physical resource block, UL/DL non-GBRPRB) utilization, UL/DL total PRB Utilization rate, etc.;
  • SSB load information can also be the hardware load index of the cell corresponding to the SSB, for example: UL/DL hardware load index (low, medium, high, overload, etc.);
  • SSB load information can also be the cell corresponding to the SSB
  • the software load index of the software such as: UL/DL software load index (low, medium, high, overload, etc.); SSB load information can also be the capacity value of the cell corresponding to the SSB, for example: UL/DL available capacity accounts
  • the load of the cell corresponding to the SSB and the load status of the cell corresponding to the SSB involved in this application are briefly described.
  • the ratio of the radio resources used by the data transmitted by the cell corresponding to the SSB occupying all the radio resources owned by the cell corresponding to the SSB is called the load of the cell corresponding to the SSB.
  • This ratio is compared with the preset ratio threshold (the preset ratio threshold). It can be a low load threshold or a high load threshold).
  • the preset ratio threshold can be a low load threshold or a high load threshold.
  • the number of PRBs in the cell corresponding to one SSB is 100, and the aforementioned preset low load threshold is 20%.
  • the resources of the cell corresponding to the SSB need to be used to transmit the first data, and the first data needs to occupy 2 PRBs.
  • the radio resources used by the data transmitted on the resources of the cell corresponding to the SSB occupy the corresponding SSB
  • the ratio of the total radio resources of the cell is 2%. In this case, the load of the cell corresponding to the SSB is low, and the SSB can be turned off; or,
  • the number of PRBs in the cell corresponding to one SSB is 100, and the above-mentioned preset high load threshold is 70%.
  • the first data needs to be transmitted on the resources of the cell corresponding to the SSB, and 80 PRBs are needed to transmit the first data.
  • the radio resources used by the data transmitted on the resources of the cell corresponding to the SSB occupy the cell corresponding to the SSB
  • the ratio of all radio resources is 80%.
  • the load of the cell corresponding to the SSB is very high. If there is other data to be transmitted, in order to ensure the transmission performance, it may be necessary to activate the cell corresponding to a SSB to perform transmission.
  • the first data needs to be transmitted on the resources of the cell corresponding to the SSB, and 101 PRBs are needed to transmit the first data.
  • the cell corresponding to the SSB cannot perform the function of transmitting the first data.
  • the SSB The load of the corresponding cell is in an overload state.
  • the cells corresponding to the above SSB can be understood as: each cell needs to send the SSB, where the SSB is used for synchronization of the terminal equipment.
  • the resources of the cell are notified to the terminal equipment through the SSB, and the resources occupied by the SSB are part of the resources of the corresponding cell.
  • SSB is mainly used in the cell search process of terminal equipment.
  • the terminal equipment described above uses PSS and SSS to complete the downlink synchronization process and the terminal equipment decodes the PBCH to obtain the MIB. Wait. That is to say, the existing communication protocol only provides the definition and usage of the SSB, but does not involve how to coordinate the occupation of system resources by the cell corresponding to the SSB.
  • each piece of information in the communication system occupies certain system resources, and the SSB is no exception, and the cells corresponding to different SSBs in the communication system occupy different resources.
  • the resources occupied by the cell corresponding to the SSB can be the time domain resources occupied by the cell corresponding to the SSB, the PCI of the cell corresponding to the SSB, etc.
  • the cells corresponding to the SSB in different network devices in the communication system occupy Different system resources, if the resources occupied by the cell corresponding to the SSB in a certain network device can be released, and other network devices in the communication system can know that the resources occupied by the cell corresponding to the SSB are released, they can Using the released resources, it is possible to implement resource coordination between different network devices in the communication system corresponding to the cells occupied by the SSB.
  • This application proposes a communication method and communication device.
  • the network device in the communication system determines to close or activate the SSB of itself or other network devices in the communication system, it sends a request message to other network devices in the communication system to request
  • Other network devices in the communication system update the status of the SSB or activate the SSB, that is, different network devices in the communication system can learn about the resources occupied by the cell corresponding to the SSB, so as to know the cell corresponding to the SSB.
  • the occupied resources are released, it is determined that the part of the resources can be used, or, when it is known that a certain part of the resources is occupied by the cell corresponding to the SSB, avoid using the part of the resources.
  • the load of the cell corresponding to the SSB may be referred to as the load of the SSB
  • the load status of the cell corresponding to the SSB may be referred to as the load state of the SSB
  • the resources occupied by the cell corresponding to the SSB may be referred to as SSB occupied.
  • the PCI of the resource and the cell corresponding to the SSB is referred to as the PCI corresponding to the SSB.
  • the communication method provided in the embodiment can be applied to resource coordination among multiple different network devices.
  • the following takes resource coordination between two network devices as an example to introduce the communication method provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the two network devices are mutually neighboring network devices, that is, the second network device maintains information about at least one SSB in the first network device, and the first network device maintains at least one of the second network devices SSB information.
  • the first network device maintains identification information of at least one SSB in the second network device
  • the first network device maintains state information of at least one SSB in the second network device
  • the first network device maintains bandwidth information of the channels of at least one cell respectively corresponding to at least one SSB in the second network device.
  • maintaining the information of at least one SSB in the first network device in the second network device includes:
  • the second network device maintains identification information of at least one SSB in the first network device
  • the second network device maintains state information of at least one SSB in the first network device
  • the second network device maintains bandwidth information of the channels of at least one cell respectively corresponding to at least one SSB in the first network device.
  • Fig. 2 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application. It includes a first network device, a second network device, and steps S110 and S120. The following describes steps S110 and S120 in detail with reference to FIG. 2.
  • the first network device determines to close or activate the first SSB.
  • the first network device determines to deactivate (deactivate, or switch-off) or activate (activate, or switch on) the first SSB in the first network device. For example, there are a total of 10 SSBs (SSB#1 ⁇ SSB#10) in the first network device, and if SSB#1 is active, the first network device determines to turn off SSB#1 in the 10 SSBs, which refers to SSB #1 transitions from the active state to the dormant state; if SSB#1 is in the dormant state, the first network device determines to activate SSB#1 of the 10 SSBs, which means that SSB#1 transitions from the dormant state to the activated state.
  • the power consumption of sending the SSB can be reduced to reduce the energy consumption of the first network device.
  • the goal of For example, in a building deployment scenario, different SSBs point to different areas: high-level, middle-level, and low-level. Closing the first SSB can close the radio frequency channel corresponding to the first SSB, thereby achieving the purpose of reducing the energy consumption of the first network device.
  • the radio frequency bandwidth and search complexity of detecting the SSB can be reduced, so as to reduce the energy consumption of the terminal equipment. That is to say, the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application can reduce the energy consumption of the first network device and reduce the radio frequency bandwidth and search complexity of the terminal device for detecting the SSB when the first network device turns off the local SSB.
  • the first network device determines to close or activate a certain SSB in the first network device as an example for description.
  • one or more SSBs in the first network device can be determined to be closed or activated, and only the SSB in the first network device is determined to be closed or activated.
  • the process of the method for multiple SSBs is similar to the process of the method for determining to close or activate one SSB in the first network device.
  • the method for determining to close or activate one SSB in the first network device is described in this article. Regarding the situation of determining to close or activate multiple SSBs in the first network device, details are not described in this application.
  • the first network device determining to turn off or activate the first SSB includes:
  • the first network device decides to close or activate the first SSB based on the load information in the first network device.
  • the load information in the first network device indicates that the DL GBR PRB utilization rate of the cell corresponding to the first SSB is lower than a certain threshold, it can be turned off and the resources occupied by the cell corresponding to the first SSB are released for other
  • the cell corresponding to the SSB occupying the same resources as the cell corresponding to the first SSB is used; for example, when the load information in the first network device indicates that there is a load that requires the first SSB to send and/or receive, then The first network device determines that the first SSB needs to be activated, so that the first SSB can send and/or receive data.
  • the first network device determining to turn off or activate the first SSB includes:
  • the first network device receives the instruction information for turning off or activating the SSB, where the instruction information for turning off or activating the SSB is used to instruct the first network device to turn off or activate the first SSB.
  • the first network device receives the instruction to turn off the first SSB, turns off the first SSB according to the received instruction information, and releases the resources occupied by the cell corresponding to the first SSB for other network devices to share with the first SSB.
  • the corresponding cell uses the cell corresponding to the SSB with the same resource occupied; for example, the first network device receives the first SSB instruction information, and activates the first SSB according to the received instruction information, so that the first SSB can send and/ Or receive data.
  • the first network device may receive the instruction information to close or activate the SSB from an operation, management, and maintenance (OAM) device, or the first network device may receive from the core network device to close or activate the SSB Instruction information, or, the first network device may receive instruction information to close or activate the SSB from other network devices.
  • OAM operation, management, and maintenance
  • the above-mentioned first network device decides to close or activate the first SSB based on the load information in the first network device or the received instruction information to close or activate the SSB. It is only an example to illustrate under what circumstances the first network device can determine Closing or activating the first SSB does not constitute any limitation to this application, and the circumstances under which other first network devices can determine to close or activate the SSB are also within the protection scope of this application.
  • the first network device determines to activate the first SSB of the SSB in the second network device. For example, there are a total of 10 SSBs (SSB#1 ⁇ SSB#10) in the second network device, and if SSB#1 in the second network device is in the dormant state, the first network device determines to activate 10 in the second network device.
  • SSB#1 in each SSB refers to the first network device requesting the second network device to change SSB#1 from the dormant state to the active state.
  • the first network device determines to activate a certain SSB in the second network device as an example for description.
  • the first network device can determine to activate one or more SSBs in the second network device, but only determines the method flow of activating multiple SSBs in the second network device.
  • the method of determining to activate an SSB in the second network device has a similar process, and for the convenience of description, it has been determined to activate an SSB in the second network device for description. For the case where the first network device determines to activate multiple SSBs in the second network device, details are not described in this application.
  • the determination by the first network device to activate the first SSB includes:
  • the first network device determines that the first SSB in the second network device needs to be activated according to the load information in the first network device.
  • the load information in the first network device indicates that the SSB is in an overload state, and the first network device learns that the first SSB in the second network device can be Help the local SSB share the load, and then the first network device requests the second network device to activate the first SSB for load balancing.
  • the determination by the first network device to activate the first SSB includes:
  • the first network device determines that the first SSB in the second network device needs to be activated according to the coverage information of the first network device. Among them, the first network device may learn the coverage of the first network device based on the measurement information reported by the terminal device. The coverage of the first network device may be whether there is a loophole in the coverage of the first network device, or it may be the first network device. The quality of coverage. And the first network device can learn the coverage that the SSB in the second network device can provide according to the historical measurement information.
  • the coverage information in the first network device indicates that the coverage quality provided by a certain SSB in the first network device is poor, and the first network device maintains information about the SSB in the second network device, which can be learned from historical measurement information The coverage that the SSB in the second network device can provide.
  • the first network device determines that the coverage provided by a certain SSB in the first network device is similar to the coverage provided by the first SSB in the second network device, and the first network device requests the second network device to activate the first SSB for Improve coverage quality.
  • the historical measurement information may include the coverage area of the SSB in the second network device.
  • the first network device determining that the first SSB is activated includes:
  • the first network device receives the activation SSB indication information, and the activation SSB indication information is used to indicate activation of the first SSB in the second network device.
  • the first network device receives the instruction information for activating the first SSB in the second network device, and activates the first SSB in the second network device according to the received instruction information.
  • the first network device may receive the instruction information for activating the SSB from the OAM device, or the first network device may receive the instruction information for deactivating or activating the SSB from the core network device, or the first network device may be from another network
  • the device receives instructions to turn off or activate SSB.
  • the above-mentioned first network device determines to activate the first SSB in the second network device based on the load information in the first network device, the coverage information of the first network device, or receiving the activation SSB indication information.
  • the circumstances under which the network device can determine to activate the first SSB in the second network device do not constitute any limitation to this application.
  • the circumstances in which other first network devices can determine to activate the first SSB in the second network device are also in this application Within the scope of protection.
  • the first network device determines to turn off or activate the first SSB
  • S120 is executed, and the first network device sends the first request message to the second network device.
  • the method shown in FIG. 2 is applied between two base stations, where the base station may be the radio access network device shown in FIG. 1.
  • the base station may be the radio access network device shown in FIG. 1.
  • the first network device sending the first request message to the second network device may include the following two methods :
  • the first request message can be directly forwarded through the interface between the first network device and the second network device.
  • the interface between the first network device and the second network device For example, the Xn interface between network device #1 and network device #2 shown in FIG.
  • the first request message may be forwarded by the core network device, that is, the first network device first sends the first request message to the core network device, and then the core network device sends the first request message to the second network device.
  • the core network device For example, network device #1 shown in FIG. 1 first sends the first request message to the core network device through the NG interface with the core network device. The core network device then sends the first request message to network device #2.
  • the first request message carries first indication information indicating the first SSB, and the first indication information may be referred to as SSB information (SSB information).
  • SSB information SSB information
  • different steps can be executed upon receiving the first request message, including the following two situations:
  • the first request message is used to request the second network device to update the state of the first SSB.
  • the first network device may determine to turn off or activate one or more SSBs in the first network device, and the first network device may determine to turn off or activate the first network device.
  • the first request message sent by the first network device to the second network device may carry multiple indication information indicating the multiple SSBs, or the first network device sends multiple instructions to the second network device.
  • a first request message, and the multiple first request messages respectively carry multiple indication information indicating the multiple SSBs.
  • the embodiments of this application do not limit how the first network device requests the second network device to learn the situation when the first network device determines to close or activate multiple SSBs in the first network device. This application is only limited to the first network device.
  • a request message sent by a network device to a second network device carries indication information indicating one or some SSBs that are activated or deactivated.
  • the first request message carries first indication information indicating the first SSB for description.
  • the first network device determines to close or activate multiple SSBs in the first network device, how the first network device requests the second network device to learn about this situation will not be described in detail in this application.
  • the first request message may be to reuse the existing interactive signaling between the first network device and the second network device, except that the information element (information element, IE).
  • the newly added IE is used to indicate the first indication information of the first SSB, and the first indication information may be referred to as SSB information.
  • SSB information The possible forms of the first indication information will be described in detail below, which will not be repeated here.
  • the first request message may be a configuration update (configuration update) message sent by the existing first network device to the second network device, and SSB information is added to the configuration update message.
  • the newly added SSB information may be an information element that occupies multiple bytes, the multiple bytes may be newly added transmission resources for transmitting SSB information, or some or all of the multiple bytes It is the reserved byte in the configuration update message.
  • the existing configuration update message is used to update the application layer configuration data.
  • the first request message may be a newly added interaction signaling between the first network device and the second network device.
  • the first request message includes a message for indicating the first SSB The first instruction information.
  • SSB update request a new SSB update request (SSB update request) message between the first network device and the second network device is added.
  • the present application does not limit the specific form of the first request message, and it may reuse existing signaling or newly-added signaling.
  • the first request message is restricted to carry the aforementioned first indication information indicating the first SSB.
  • the first network device shuts down the first SSB in the first network device, and the first request message is used to request the second network device to change the SSB information of at least one of the first network devices maintained by the second network device,
  • the status of an SSB is updated from the active state to the dormant state; for example, if the first network device activates the first SSB in the first network device, the first request message is used to request the second network device to maintain the second network device
  • the state of the first SSB is updated from the dormant state to the active state.
  • the second network device may locally enable the SSB that occupies the same resource as the cell corresponding to the first SSB.
  • the SSB enabled in the second network device may be configured with the same frequency and PCI as the first SSB.
  • the risk of SSB configuration conflicts between neighboring network devices can be reduced; for example, the second network device knows the number of PRBs occupied by the channel of the cell corresponding to the first SSB in the first network device and the transmission bandwidth in units of resource blocks.
  • the channel bandwidth of the cell corresponding to the first SSB accounts for the percentage of the total channel bandwidth, etc.
  • the second network device performs coordinated utilization of available resources (for example, PRB) based on this information, to achieve the purpose of resource coordination, thereby reducing the The interference between the second network device and the first network device, thereby improving the signal-to-noise ratio and throughput.
  • available resources for example, PRB
  • the method flow shown in FIG. 2 further includes S121, the second network device updates the state of the first SSB.
  • the second network device maintains the information of at least one SSB in the first network device.
  • the second network device After receiving the first request message, the second network device accurately learns the first indication information carried in the first request message.
  • the state of the SSB changes, and the state of the first SSB in the information of at least one SSB in the first network device maintained in the second network device is updated.
  • the information of at least one SSB in the first network device maintained by the second network device constitutes the information list of the SSB.
  • the status of the first SSB is updated, it is equivalent to updating the first network device maintained by the second network device. List of SSB information.
  • the first request message is used to request the second network device to update the state of the first SSB in the SSB information in the first network device maintained by the second network device from the active state to the dormant state, then the second network device receives After the first request message, update the state of the first SSB in the at least one SSB in the first network device maintained in the second network device to the dormant state;
  • the first request message is used to request the second network device to change the SSB information of at least one of the first network devices maintained by the second network device
  • the state of the first SSB is updated from the dormant state to the active state.
  • the second network device updates the state of the first SSB in at least one SSB of the first network device maintained in the second network device to Active state.
  • the method flow shown in FIG. 2 further includes S122.
  • the second network device sends a first response message to the first network device.
  • the first response message is used to indicate whether the second network device successfully updates the state of the first SSB. Specifically, when the first request message is to reuse the configuration update message sent by the existing first network device to the second network device, the first response message may also be to reuse the existing second network device to send to the first network device.
  • the existing configuration update confirmation or failure message is used to indicate the success or failure of updating the application layer configuration data.
  • the first response message is a newly added SSB update request acknowledge/failure (SSB update request) message between the first network device and the second network device.
  • the second network device After the second network device successfully updates the status of the first SSB, the second network device sends a first response message to the first network device to notify the first network device that the status of the first SSB requested by the first network device has been successfully updated For example, when the second network device fails to update the status of the first SSB, the second network device sends a first response message to the first network device to notify the first network device that the status of the first SSB requested by the first network device has not been updated Was successfully executed.
  • the failure of the second network device to update the state of the first SSB may be that the second network device has not successfully determined the first SSB, or it may be that the state of the first SSB is set to be unchangeable.
  • the first response message when the above-mentioned first response message is used to indicate that the second network device has not successfully updated the status of the first SSB, the first response message may carry the first duration to indicate that the first network device is in the first duration Then the first request message can be sent to the second network device again.
  • the first response message when the second network device fails to update the status of the first SSB, the first response message includes a waiting time of 10 ms, indicating that the first network device can resend the first request message to the second network device after 10 ms.
  • the first request message is used to request the second network device to activate the first SSB.
  • the first network device may determine to activate one or more SSBs in the second network device, and the first network device may determine to activate multiple SSBs in the second network device.
  • the first request message sent by the first network device to the second network device may carry multiple indication information indicating the multiple SSBs, or the first network device sends multiple first requests to the second network device Message, the multiple first request messages respectively carry multiple indication information indicating the multiple SSBs.
  • the embodiments of this application do not limit the situation where the first network device determines to activate multiple SSBs in the second network device, how the first network device requests the second network device to learn about the situation, this application is only limited to the first network
  • the request message sent by the device to the second network device carries indication information indicating one or some SSBs that are activated or deactivated.
  • the first request message carries first indication information indicating the first SSB for description.
  • the first network device determines to activate multiple SSBs in the second network device, how the first network device requests the second network device to know this situation will not be described in detail in this application.
  • the first request message may reuse the existing interactive signaling between the first network device and the second network device, and add an IE to the existing signaling.
  • the newly added IE is the first indication information used to indicate the first SSB, and the first indication information may be referred to as SSB information.
  • the first request message may be a cell activation request (cell activation request) message sent by the existing first network device to the second network device, and SSB information is added to the cell activation request message, where: The existing cell activation request message is used by the second network device to activate the closed cell.
  • cell activation request cell activation request
  • the first request message may be a newly added interaction signaling between the first network device and the second network device.
  • the first request message includes a message for indicating the first SSB The first instruction information.
  • the first request message is used to request the second network device to activate the first SSB in the second network device, and the first SSB in the second network device is The state of an SSB is updated from the dormant state to the active state.
  • the method flow shown in FIG. 2 further includes S123, the second network device activates the first SSB.
  • the method flow shown in FIG. 2 further includes S124.
  • the second network device sends a third response message to the first network device, where the third response message is used to indicate whether the second network device successfully activates the second network device.
  • the third response message may be to reuse the existing second network device to the first network device.
  • the existing cell activation response message is used to indicate that one or more cells that were previously turned off have been successfully activated, and the existing cell activation failure message is used to indicate that the cell activation failed.
  • the method flow shown in FIG. 2 further includes S125, the first network device Update the status of the first SSB.
  • the first network device maintains information about at least one SSB in the second network device, and after receiving the third response message, the first network device updates the information of at least one SSB in the second network device maintained in the first network device.
  • the state of the first SSB in the information list is updated from the dormant state to the active state.
  • the second network device can update the state of the first SSB or activate the first SSB after receiving the first request message. Because the first request message carries the first indication information indicating the first SSB, the second network device can accurately learn which SSB status to update or which SSB is activated according to the first indication information.
  • the first indication information includes at least one of the following information:
  • the identification information of the first SSB includes:
  • the physical cell identity of the first SSB or,
  • the physical cell identity of the first SSB and the radio frequency reference frequency of the first SSB are identical to the physical cell identity of the first SSB and the radio frequency reference frequency of the first SSB; or,
  • the physical cell identity of the first SSB and the new wireless absolute radio frequency channel number of the first SSB are the physical cell identity of the first SSB and the new wireless absolute radio frequency channel number of the first SSB; or,
  • the new radio cell global identity NCGI of the first SSB or,
  • the identification ID of the first SSB is the identification ID of the first SSB.
  • the channel bandwidth information of the cell corresponding to the first SSB includes at least one of the following information:
  • the first indication information may be referred to as SSB information.
  • the possible forms of the SSB information have been described in detail in the foregoing, and how to indicate the SSB in different forms, which will not be repeated here.
  • the method flow shown in FIG. 2 further includes S111, the first network device sends a second request message to the second network device .
  • the second request message is used to request the terminal device to be switched from the first network device to the second network device, wherein the second request message carries second indication information, and the second The indication information is used to indicate that the reason why the terminal device switches from the first network device to the second network device is that the first SSB is about to be closed.
  • the terminal device that the first network device requests to switch is the terminal device served by the first SSB in the first network device.
  • the first SSB will stop providing services to the terminal device.
  • the SSB involved in providing services for a certain terminal device or devices refers to that the terminal device or devices transmit data via the resources occupied by the cell corresponding to the SSB.
  • the second network device may set the access priority of the terminal device switched from the first SSB that is closed in the first network device. For example, in order to ensure that the terminal device served by the first SSB is successfully handed over to the service provided by the preset SSB in the second network device, the second network device will perform access control for the terminal device served by the first SSB.
  • the terminal device provided by an SSB is set to be connected to the second network device with high priority. Specifically, for example, if it is necessary to add new terminal devices served by the preset SSB in the second network device, including the newly added UE#1 and the terminal device UE#2 served by the first SSB, then when performing access control, The second network device sets UE#2 as high priority.
  • the method flow shown in FIG. 2 further includes S112, the first network device receives the second response message sent by the second network device.
  • the second response message is used to indicate the resource preparation status of the second network device for the terminal device.
  • the second response message is used to indicate that the resources of the second network device for the terminal device are ready, and the terminal device can be received as a service provided by the preset SSB in the second network device; for example, the second response The message is used to indicate that the resource for the terminal device in the second network device is not ready.
  • the second network device determines that the preset SSB in the second network device can provide services for the terminal device that provides services for the first SSB.
  • the first network device turns off the first SSB.
  • the terminal device served by the first SSB switches to the SSB service preset in the second network device. Therefore, the terminal device performs radio resource control (Radio Resource Control, RRC) reconfiguration based on the preset SSB in the second network device and the second network device.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • this embodiment does not limit the first network device to necessarily perform subsequent S110 and S120 after performing S111 and S112. That is to say, the main limitation of this embodiment is that the second request message carries the reason for instructing the terminal device to switch from the first network device to the second network device: the first SSB is about to be closed.
  • the second instruction information carries the reason for instructing the terminal device to switch from the first network device to the second network device: the first SSB is about to be closed. The second instruction information.
  • the method shown in FIG. 2 may be applied between two base stations, where the base station may be the radio access network device shown in FIG. 1.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides another communication method that can be applied to resource coordination among multiple different network devices.
  • the following takes resource coordination between two network devices (the third network device and the fifth network device), but the signaling interaction between the two network devices needs to be performed through other network devices as an example to introduce the method provided by the embodiments of the present application Communication method.
  • the two network devices are mutually neighboring network devices, that is, the third network device maintains information about at least one SSB in the fifth network device, and the fifth network device maintains information about at least one SSB in the third network device,
  • the other network devices are referred to as the fourth network device.
  • the fourth network device maintains information about at least one SSB in the third network device and information about at least one SSB in the fifth network device. It should be understood that the fourth network device The device does not include the SSB, but only maintains the information of the SSB in other network devices. In this embodiment, the fourth network device is mainly used to establish communication between the third network device and the fifth network device.
  • Fig. 3 is a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application. Including a third network device, a fourth network device, a fifth network device, and steps S210, S220, and S223.
  • the third network device may be distributed unit #1 in the scene diagram shown in FIG. 1, and the fourth network device may It is the centralized unit in the scene diagram shown in FIG. 1, and the fifth network device may be the distributed unit #2 in the scene diagram shown in FIG.
  • the steps S210, S220, and S223 are described in detail below with reference to FIG. 3.
  • the third network device determines to close or activate the second SSB.
  • the third network device determines to close or activate the second SSB in the third network device. Specifically, in this embodiment, the third network device determines to close or activate the second SSB in the third network device, and the first network device in the communication method flow shown in FIG. 2 determines to close or activate the first network
  • the first SSB in the device is similar, except that the execution subject is the third network device, and the object to be closed or activated is the second SSB in the third network device, which will not be described in this embodiment.
  • the benefits of closing the second SSB to the third network device are the same as those of the first network device shown in FIG. 2 after determining that the first SSB in the first network device is closed.
  • the benefits brought by the network equipment are similar; and the benefits brought to the fifth network equipment are the same as those shown in Figure 2 for the second network equipment after the first network equipment determines to close the first SSB in the first network equipment.
  • the benefits are similar and will not be repeated in this embodiment.
  • the third network device determines to close or activate the second SSB in the same manner as shown in FIG. 2 when the first SSB is the first network device.
  • the first network device determines to close or activate the first SSB.
  • the third network device decides to turn off or activate the second SSB based on the load information in the third network device, or the third network device receives the instruction information to turn off or activate the SSB, and the instruction information to turn off or activate the SSB is used Instructing the third network device to turn off or activate the second SSB, it will not be repeated in this embodiment.
  • the above-mentioned third network device decides to turn off or activate the second SSB based on the load information in the third network device or receives the instruction to turn off or activate the SSB. It is just an example to illustrate under what circumstances the third network device can turn off or activate The second SSB does not constitute any limitation to this application, and other third network devices can determine the situation where the SSB is closed or activated are also within the protection scope of this application.
  • the third network device determines to activate the second SSB of the SSB in the fifth network device.
  • the third network device determines to activate the second SSB of the SSB in the fifth network device, and the first network device determines to activate the second network device in the communication method flow shown in FIG. 2
  • the first SSB is similar to the first SSB, except that the execution subject is the third network device, and the object of activation is the second SSB in the fifth network device, which will not be repeated in this embodiment.
  • the third network device determines to activate the second SSB in the same manner as shown in FIG. 2 when the first SSB is an SSB in the second network device. , The first network device determines that the activation of the first SSB is similar.
  • the third network device determines that the second SSB in the fifth network device needs to be activated according to the load information in the third network device, or the third network device determines that the fifth network needs to be activated according to the coverage information of the third network device
  • the second SSB in the device, or the third network device receives the activation SSB indication information, and the activation SSB indication information is used to instruct to activate the second SSB in the fifth network device, which will not be described in this embodiment.
  • the above-mentioned third network device decides to activate the second SSB in the fifth network device based on the load information in the third network device, the coverage information of the third network device, or receiving the activation SSB indication information.
  • the circumstances under which the network device can decide to activate the second SSB in the fifth network device do not constitute any limitation to this application.
  • the circumstances in which other third network devices can determine to activate the second SSB in the fifth network device are also in this application Within the scope of protection.
  • the third network device determines to close or activate the second SSB
  • S220 is executed, and the third network device sends a third request message to the fourth network device.
  • the third request message carries the second SSB indicating the second SSB.
  • the third indication information may be called SSB information.
  • the third request message is used to request the fourth network device to send a fourth request message to the fifth network device.
  • the fourth request message also carries There is third indication information indicating the second SSB.
  • the method flow shown in FIG. 3 further includes S221, the fourth network device updates the state of the second SSB.
  • the fourth network device maintains information about at least one SSB in the third network device and information about at least one SSB in the fifth network device.
  • the fourth network device updates the status of the second SSB including the following situations:
  • the second SSB is an SSB in the third network device. Since the fourth network device maintains information about at least one SSB in the third network device, the fourth network device receives the third After the request message, it can be determined to update the state of the second SSB according to the third indication information used for indicating the second SSB carried in the third request message.
  • the possible form of the third indication information is similar to the first indication information involved in the communication method shown in FIG. 2, except that the first indication information is used to indicate the first SSB and the third indication information is used to indicate the second SSB. In this embodiment, the third indication information will not be repeated.
  • the third network device closes the second SSB in the third network device, and after receiving the third request message, the fourth network device adds the first SSB information of at least one of the third network devices maintained by the fourth network device.
  • the status of the second SSB is updated from the active state to the dormant state; for example, the third network device activates the second SSB in the third network device, and after receiving the third request message, the fourth network device maintains the fourth network device
  • the state of the second SSB is updated from the dormant state to the active state.
  • the present application does not limit the specific form of the third request message, and it may reuse existing signaling or newly added signaling. This application only restricts the third request message to carry the aforementioned third indication information indicating the second SSB.
  • the second SSB is an SSB in the fifth network device. Since the fourth network device also maintains information about at least one SSB in the fifth network device, the fourth network device receives After the third request message, it can be determined to update the state of the second SSB according to the third indication information used for indicating the second SSB carried in the third request message.
  • the method flow shown in FIG. 3 further includes S222.
  • the fourth network device sends a fifth response message to the third network device.
  • the fifth response message is used to indicate whether the fourth network device successfully updates the state of the second SSB.
  • the fifth response message may be reuse The distributed unit configuration update acknowledgement/failure (gNB-DU configuration update acknowledge/failure) message sent by the existing fourth network device to the third network device.
  • the distributed unit configuration update acknowledgement/failure gNB-DU configuration update acknowledge/failure
  • the fourth network device After the fourth network device successfully updates the status of the second SSB, the fourth network device sends a fifth response message to the third network device to notify the third network device that the status of the second SSB requested by the third network device has been successfully updated For example, when the fourth network device fails to update the status of the second SSB, the fourth network device sends a fifth response message to the third network device to notify the third network device that the status of the second SSB requested by the third network device has not been updated Was successfully executed.
  • the fifth response message includes a waiting time of 10 ms, indicating that the third network device can resend the third request message to the fourth network device after 10 ms.
  • the method flow shown in FIG. 3 further includes S223.
  • the fourth network device sends the fourth request message to the fifth network device.
  • different steps may be executed upon receiving the fourth request message, including the following two situations:
  • the fourth request message is used to request the fifth network device to update the state of the second SSB.
  • the present application does not limit the specific form of the fourth request message, and it may reuse existing signaling or newly added signaling. This application only restricts the fourth request message to carry the aforementioned third indication information.
  • the method flow shown in FIG. 3 further includes S224, the fifth network device updates the state of the second SSB.
  • the fifth network device maintains information about at least one SSB in the third network device.
  • the fifth network device After receiving the fourth request message, the fifth network device accurately learns the second information according to the third indication information carried in the fourth request message.
  • the state of the SSB changes, and the state of the second SSB in the information of at least one SSB in the third network device maintained in the fifth network device is updated. That is to say, the information of at least one SSB in the third network device maintained by the fifth network device constitutes the information list of the SSB.
  • the status of the second SSB is updated, it is equivalent to updating the third network device maintained by the fifth network device. List of SSB information.
  • the fourth request message is used to request the fifth network device to update the state of the second SSB from the active state to the dormant state in the SSB information of at least one of the third network devices maintained by the fifth network device, then the fifth network device After receiving the fourth request message, update the state of the second SSB in at least one SSB of the third network device maintained in the fifth network device to the dormant state; for example, the third network device determines to activate the state of the second SSB in the third network device.
  • the fourth request message is used to request the fifth network device to update the state of the second SSB from the dormant state to the active state in the SSB information of at least one of the third network devices maintained by the fifth network device, then the first After receiving the fourth request message, the fifth network device updates the state of the second SSB in the at least one SSB in the third network device maintained in the fifth network device to an active state.
  • the method flow shown in FIG. 3 further includes S225.
  • the fifth network device sends an eighth response message to the fourth network device, where the eighth response message is used to indicate whether the fifth network device successfully updates the The status of the second SSB.
  • the method flow shown in FIG. 3 further includes S2251.
  • the fourth network device sends an eleventh response message to the third network device, where the eleventh response message is used to indicate whether the fifth network device is successfully updated.
  • the status of the second SSB The status of the second SSB.
  • the eighth response message may be multiplexing the existing fifth network device to the first 4.
  • the fifth network device sends an eighth response message to the fourth network device to indicate that the update of the status of the second SSB has been successfully performed; for example, the fifth network device
  • the fifth network device sends an eighth response message to the fourth network device to indicate that the update of the status of the second SSB has not been successfully performed.
  • the failure of the fifth network device to update the status of the second SSB may be that the fifth network device has not successfully determined the second SSB according to the third indication information, or it may be that the status of the second SSB is set to be unchangeable.
  • the eighth response message when the above-mentioned eighth response message is used to indicate that the fifth network device has not successfully updated the status of the second SSB, the eighth response message may carry a third duration, which is used to indicate that the fourth network device is in the third duration Later, the fourth request message can be sent to the fifth network device again.
  • the fourth network device sends an eleventh response message to the third network device for instructing the update of the second SSB The status has been successfully executed; for example, when the fifth network device fails to update the status of the second SSB, the fourth network device sends an eleventh response message to the third network device to indicate that the update of the status of the second SSB was not successfully performed .
  • the eleventh response message when the above-mentioned eleventh response message is used to indicate that the fifth network device has not successfully updated the status of the second SSB, the eleventh response message may carry a sixth duration for indicating that the third network device is in the first After six hours, the third request message can be sent to the fourth network device again
  • the fourth request message is used to request the fifth network device to activate the second SSB.
  • the fourth request message is used to request the fifth network device to activate the second SSB in the fifth network device, and the second SSB in the fifth network device is The state of the SSB is updated from the dormant state to the active state.
  • the method flow shown in FIG. 3 further includes S226:
  • the fifth network device activates the second SSB.
  • the method flow shown in FIG. 3 further includes S227.
  • the fifth network device sends a ninth response message to the fourth network device, where the ninth response message is used to indicate whether the fifth network device successfully activates the fifth network device.
  • the second SSB in the network device in the network device.
  • the method flow shown in FIG. 3 further includes S228: 3.
  • the network device sends a sixth response message.
  • the sixth response message is used to indicate whether the fifth network device successfully activates the second SSB.
  • the method flow shown in FIG. 3 further includes S229.
  • the third network device updates the state of the second SSB.
  • the third network device maintains information about at least one SSB in the fifth network device, and after receiving the sixth response message, the third network device updates the information of at least one SSB in the fifth network device maintained in the third network device.
  • the state of the second SSB in the information list is updated from the dormant state to the active state.
  • the reason why the fourth network device can update the status of the second SSB after receiving the third request message is because the third request message carries the third indication information indicating the second SSB, and the fourth The network device can accurately learn the status of which SSB to update according to the third indication information; similarly, the fifth network device can update the status of the second SSB or activate the second SSB after receiving the fourth request message. It is because the fourth request message carries third indication information indicating the second SSB, and the fifth network device can accurately learn which SSB status to update or which SSB is activated according to the third indication information.
  • the method flow shown in FIG. 3 further includes S211, the third network device sends a fifth request message to the fourth network device .
  • the fifth request message is used to request the fourth network device to send a sixth request message to the fifth network device, wherein the fifth request message carries fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate The reason why the terminal device switches from the third network device to the fifth network device is that the second SSB is about to be closed.
  • the method flow shown in FIG. 3 further includes S212.
  • the fourth network device sends a sixth request message to the fifth network device.
  • the sixth request message is used to request the terminal device to be switched from the third network device to the fifth network device, and the sixth request message carries the fourth indication information.
  • the method flow shown in FIG. 3 further includes S213, the fifth network device sends a twelfth response message to the fourth network device.
  • the twelfth response message is used to indicate the resource preparation status of the fifth network device for the terminal device.
  • the method flow shown in FIG. 3 further includes S214.
  • the third network device receives a fourth response message sent by the fourth network device.
  • the fourth response message is used to indicate the resource preparation status of the fifth network device for the terminal device.
  • the fourth response message is used to indicate that the resources of the fifth network device for the terminal device are ready, and the terminal device can be received as a load in the fifth network device; for example, the fourth response message is used to indicate The resources of the fifth network device for the terminal device are not yet ready.
  • this embodiment does not limit the third network device to necessarily perform subsequent S210 to S220 after performing S211 to S214. That is to say, the main limitation of this application is that the fifth request message and the sixth request message carry the reason for instructing the terminal device to switch from the third network device to the fifth network device because the second SSB The fourth instruction message about to be closed.
  • the present application is another communication method provided by the embodiment, which can be applied to load balancing between network devices.
  • the following uses the fourth network device to balance the load of the two network devices (the third network device and the fifth network device) as an example to introduce the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the third network device and the fifth network device are neighbor network devices, that is, the third network device maintains the information of at least one SSB in the fifth network device, and the fifth network device maintains the third network device.
  • Information about at least one SSB in the network device is maintained in the fourth network device Information.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application. It includes a third network device, a fourth network device, a fifth network device, and steps S310 and S320, where the third network device may be distributed unit #1 in the scene diagram shown in FIG. 1, and the fourth network device may be The centralized unit and the fifth network device in the scene diagram shown in FIG. 1 may be distributed unit #2 in the scene diagram shown in FIG. 1. Steps S310 and S320 will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 4.
  • S310 The third network device sends a load report message to the fourth network device.
  • the load report message is used to indicate the load status of the cell corresponding to the SSB in the third network device. It should be understood that the load report message may be referred to as SSB load information (SSB load information).
  • SSB load information SSB load information
  • the load report message includes SSB information corresponding to one or more SSBs in the third network device, and cell load information corresponding to the one or more SSBs respectively, where the SSB information corresponding to the one or more SSBs respectively Used to indicate the one or more SSBs.
  • the SSB information includes at least one of identification information of the SSB and channel bandwidth information of the cell corresponding to the SSB.
  • identification information of the SSB and the channel bandwidth information of the cell corresponding to the SSB have been described in detail above, and will not be repeated here.
  • the load information includes at least one of the following information:
  • the overload state indication information of the cell is used to indicate that the cell corresponding to the SSB is in an overload state or a non-overload state.
  • S320 The fourth network device performs load balancing.
  • the fourth network device decides to activate or deactivate the third SSB in the third network device according to the load report message sent by the third network device; or the fourth network device decides to activate or deactivate the third SSB in the third network device according to the load report message sent by the third network device, Decided to activate the fourth SSB in the fifth network device.
  • the fourth network device decides to turn off the third SSB in the third network device. For another example, if the load of the cell corresponding to the third SSB in the third network device is greater than or equal to the predetermined load (for example, the high load threshold mentioned above), and the fourth network device knows the fifth network device according to historical measurement information If the fourth SSB in the third network device can provide the coverage required by the third SSB in the third network device, the fourth network device decides to activate the fourth SSB in the fifth network device.
  • the predetermined load for example, the aforementioned low load threshold
  • the method shown in FIG. 4 further includes:
  • the fourth network device sends a seventh request message to the third network device.
  • the seventh request message is used to instruct the third network device to turn off or activate the third SSB.
  • the seventh request message carries fifth indication information indicating the third SSB.
  • the possible form of the fifth indication information is similar to the first indication information involved in the communication method shown in FIG. 2. Only the first indication information is used to indicate the first SSB and the fifth indication information is used to indicate the third SSB. In this embodiment, the fifth indication information is not described again.
  • S331 The third network device updates the status of the SSB.
  • the third network device After receiving the seventh request message, the third network device updates the state of the third SSB.
  • updating the status of the SSB by the third network device includes the following two situations:
  • Case 1 The seventh request message requests the third network device to turn off the third SSB. After receiving the seventh request message, the third network device learns that the third SSB can be turned off according to the fifth indication information carried in the seventh request message, and then updates the state of the third SSB from the active state to the dormant state.
  • Case 2 The seventh request message requests the third network device to activate the third SSB. After receiving the seventh request message, the third network device learns that the third SSB needs to be activated according to the fifth indication information carried in the seventh request message, and then updates the state of the third SSB from the dormant state to the activated state.
  • S332 The third network device sends a seventh response message to the fourth network device.
  • the seventh response message is used to indicate whether the third SSB is successfully closed or activated.
  • the seventh response message may carry a fourth duration, which is used to indicate that the fourth network device can reconnect to the third network after the fourth duration.
  • the device sends the seventh request message.
  • the method shown in FIG. 4 further includes:
  • the fourth network device sends a tenth request message to the fifth network device.
  • the tenth request message is used to instruct the fifth network device to activate the fourth SSB.
  • the tenth request message carries sixth indication information indicating the fourth SSB.
  • the possible form of the sixth indication information is similar to the first indication information involved in the communication method shown in FIG. 2. Only the first indication information is used to indicate the first SSB and the fifth indication information is used to indicate the fourth SSB. In this embodiment, the sixth indication information is not described again.
  • S334 The fifth network device activates the state of the fourth SSB.
  • the fifth network device After receiving the tenth request message, the fifth network device activates the fourth SSB.
  • S335 The fifth network device sends a thirteenth response message to the fourth network device.
  • the thirteenth response message is used to indicate whether the fourth SSB is successfully activated. Specifically, if the thirteenth response message is used to indicate that the fourth SSB is not successfully activated, the thirteenth response message may carry a fifth duration, which is used to indicate that the fourth network device can reconnect to the fifth network after the fifth duration. The device sends the tenth request message.
  • the fifth network device may also send a load report message to the fourth network device.
  • the method shown in FIG. 4 further includes S340.
  • the fifth network device sends a load report message to the fourth network device.
  • the load report message is used to indicate the load status of the cell corresponding to the SSB in the fifth network device.
  • the load report message includes SSB information corresponding to one or more SSBs in the fifth network device, and cell load information corresponding to the one or more SSBs respectively.
  • the load report message sent by the fifth network device is similar in content to the load report message sent by the third network device to the fourth network device, which is not repeated here.
  • the fourth network device may only determine to close or activate the third SSB in the third network device according to the load report message sent by the third network device; or determine to activate the fourth network The fourth SSB in the device; and the fourth network device may only determine to close or activate the fourth SSB in the fourth network device based on the load report message sent by the fourth network device; or, determine to activate the second SSB in the third network device Three SSB.
  • the size of the sequence numbers of the foregoing processes does not mean the order of execution, and the execution order of the processes should be determined by their functions and internal logic, and should not correspond to the implementation process of the embodiments of this application. Constitute any limitation.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of the communication device 10 proposed in the present application.
  • the device 10 includes a sending unit 110 and a processing unit 120.
  • the processing unit 120 is configured to determine to close or activate the first synchronization signal and the physical broadcast channel block SSB;
  • the sending unit 110 is configured to send a first request message to a second network device, where the first request message carries first indication information indicating the first SSB;
  • the first request message is used to request the second network device to update the state of the first SSB, wherein the second network Information of at least one SSB in the communication device is maintained in the equipment; or,
  • the processing unit determines to activate the first SSB, and the first SSB is one of the SSBs in the second network device, the first request message is used to request the second network The device activates the first SSB, wherein the first network device maintains information about at least one SSB in the second network device.
  • the device 10 is completely corresponding to the first network device in the method embodiment, and the corresponding unit of the device 10 is used to execute the corresponding steps performed by the first network device in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 2.
  • the sending unit 110 in the apparatus 10 executes the steps sent by the first network device in the method embodiment. For example, step 120 of sending the first request message to the second network device in FIG. 2 is performed, or step 111 of sending the second request message to the second network device in FIG. 2 is performed.
  • the processing unit 120 executes the steps implemented or processed inside the first network device in the method embodiment. For example, perform step 110 in FIG. 2 for determining to close or activate the first synchronization signal and physical broadcast channel block SSB, or perform step 125 in FIG. 2 for updating the state of the first SSB.
  • the apparatus 10 may further include a receiving unit 130, configured to receive information sent by other devices. For example, perform step 122 in FIG. 2 for receiving a first response message sent by a second network device, or perform step 112 for receiving a second response message sent by a second network device in FIG. 2, or perform step 112 in FIG. Step 124 of the third response message.
  • a receiving unit 130 configured to receive information sent by other devices. For example, perform step 122 in FIG. 2 for receiving a first response message sent by a second network device, or perform step 112 for receiving a second response message sent by a second network device in FIG. 2, or perform step 112 in FIG. Step 124 of the third response message.
  • the receiving unit 130 and the sending unit 110 may constitute a transceiving unit and have the functions of receiving and sending at the same time.
  • the processing unit 120 may be a processor.
  • the transmitting unit 110 may be a transmitter.
  • the receiving unit 130 may be a receiver. The receiver and transmitter can be integrated to form a transceiver.
  • Fig. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of a first network device 40 applicable to an embodiment of the present application, and can be used to implement the function of the first network device in the above-mentioned communication method.
  • the first network device 40 may include one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) 401 and one or more base band units (BBU).
  • the baseband unit may also be referred to as a digital unit (DU) 402.
  • the RRU 401 may be called a transceiver unit, which corresponds to the sending unit 110 in FIG. 5.
  • the transceiver unit 401 may also be called a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., and it may include at least one antenna 4011 and a radio frequency unit 4012.
  • the transceiving unit 401 may include a receiving unit and a transmitting unit, the receiving unit may correspond to a receiver (or receiver, receiving circuit), and the transmitting unit may correspond to a transmitter (or transmitter, transmitting circuit).
  • the RRU 401 part is mainly used for the transmission and reception of radio frequency signals and the conversion between radio frequency signals and baseband signals, for example, for sending the control information described in the foregoing embodiments to terminal equipment.
  • the BBU402 part is mainly used for baseband processing and control of base stations.
  • the RRU 401 and the BBU 402 may be physically set together, or may be physically separated, that is, a distributed base station.
  • the BBU 402 is the control center of the network equipment, and may also be called a processing unit, which may correspond to the processing unit 120 in FIG. 5, and is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel coding, multiplexing, modulation, and spreading.
  • the BBU (processing unit) 402 can be used to control the network device 40 to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment, for example, to determine the length of the symbol carrying the control information of the terminal device.
  • the BBU 402 may be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards may jointly support a radio access network of a single access standard (for example, an LTE system, or a 5G system), or may respectively support different Access standard wireless access network.
  • the BBU 402 further includes a memory 4021 and a processor 4022.
  • the memory 4021 is used to store necessary instructions and data.
  • the memory 4021 stores the codebook in the above-mentioned embodiment and the like.
  • the processor 4022 is used to control the base station to perform necessary actions, for example, to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the memory 4021 and the processor 4022 may serve one or more single boards. In other words, the memory and the processor can be set separately on each board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits can be provided on each board.
  • the network device 40 shown in FIG. 6 can implement the first network device function involved in the method embodiment of FIG. 2.
  • the operations and/or functions of each unit in the first network device 40 are respectively for implementing the corresponding process executed by the first network device in the method embodiment of the present application. To avoid repetition, detailed description is omitted here.
  • the structure of the first network device illustrated in FIG. 6 is only a possible form, and should not constitute any limitation in the embodiment of the present application. This application does not exclude the possibility of other network device structures that may appear in the future.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of the communication device 20 proposed in the present application.
  • the device 20 includes a receiving unit 210 and a processing unit 220.
  • the receiving unit 210 is configured to receive a first request message sent by a first network device, where the first request message carries first indication information indicating the first SSB; the first request message is used to request the
  • the processing unit 220 in the communication device updates the state of the first synchronization signal and the physical broadcast channel block SSB or activates the first SSB;
  • the processing unit 220 is configured to update the state of the first SSB, wherein The communication device maintains information about the SSB in the first network device;
  • the processing unit 220 is configured to activate the first SSB, wherein the first network device The information of the SSB in the communication device is maintained.
  • the device 20 is completely corresponding to the second network device in the method embodiment, and the corresponding unit of the device 20 is used to execute the corresponding steps performed by the second network device in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 2.
  • the receiving unit 210 in the apparatus 20 executes the steps of receiving by the second network device in the method embodiment. For example, step 120 of receiving the first request message sent by the first network device in FIG. 2 is performed, or step 111 of receiving the second request message sent by the first network device in FIG. 2 is performed.
  • the processing unit 220 executes the steps implemented or processed inside the second network device in the method embodiment. For example, step 121 for updating the state of the first SSB in FIG. 2 is performed, or step 123 for activating the first SSB in FIG. 2 is performed.
  • the apparatus 20 may further include a sending unit 230 for sending information to other devices. For example, perform step 122 of sending a first response message to the first network device in FIG. 2, or perform step 112 of sending a second response message to the first network device in FIG. 2, or perform sending to the first network device in FIG. Step 124 of the third response message.
  • a sending unit 230 for sending information to other devices. For example, perform step 122 of sending a first response message to the first network device in FIG. 2, or perform step 112 of sending a second response message to the first network device in FIG. 2, or perform sending to the first network device in FIG. Step 124 of the third response message.
  • the receiving unit 210 and the sending unit 230 may constitute a transceiving unit and have both receiving and sending functions.
  • the processing unit 220 may be a processor.
  • the sending unit 230 may be a transmitter.
  • the receiving unit 210 may be a receiver. The receiver and transmitter can be integrated to form a transceiver.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a second network device 50 applicable to an embodiment of the present application, and can be used to implement the function of the second network device in the foregoing communication method.
  • the second network device 50 may include one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) 501 and one or more baseband units (BBU).
  • the baseband unit may also be referred to as a digital unit (DU) 502.
  • the RRU 501 may be called a transceiver unit, which corresponds to the receiving unit 210 in FIG. 7.
  • the transceiver unit 501 may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., and it may include at least one antenna 5011 and a radio frequency unit 5012.
  • the transceiving unit 501 may include a receiving unit and a transmitting unit, the receiving unit may correspond to a receiver (also called a receiver, a receiving circuit), and the transmitting unit may correspond to a transmitter (also called a transmitter, a transmitting circuit).
  • the RRU501 part is mainly used for receiving and sending of radio frequency signals and conversion of radio frequency signals and baseband signals, for example, for sending the control information described in the foregoing embodiments to terminal equipment.
  • the BBU502 part is mainly used for baseband processing and control of the base station.
  • the RRU501 and the BBU502 may be physically set together, or may be physically separated, that is, a distributed base station.
  • the BBU 502 is the control center of the network equipment, and may also be called a processing unit, which may correspond to the processing unit 220 in FIG. 7, and is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel coding, multiplexing, modulation, and spreading.
  • the BBU (processing unit) 502 may be used to control the network device 50 to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment, for example, to determine the length of the symbol carrying the control information of the terminal device.
  • the BBU502 may be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards may jointly support a radio access network of a single access standard (for example, an LTE system or a 5G system), and may also support different Access standard wireless access network.
  • the BBU 502 further includes a memory 5021 and a processor 5022.
  • the memory 5021 is used to store necessary instructions and data.
  • the memory 5021 stores the codebook in the above-mentioned embodiment and the like.
  • the processor 5022 is used to control the base station to perform necessary actions, for example, to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the memory 5021 and the processor 5022 may serve one or more single boards. In other words, the memory and the processor can be set separately on each board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits can be provided on each board.
  • the network device 50 shown in FIG. 8 can implement the second network device function involved in the method embodiment of FIG. 2.
  • the operations and/or functions of each unit in the second network device 50 are respectively for implementing the corresponding process executed by the second network device in the method embodiment of the present application. To avoid repetition, detailed description is omitted here.
  • the structure of the second network device illustrated in FIG. 8 is only a possible form, and should not constitute any limitation in the embodiment of the present application. This application does not exclude the possibility of other network device structures that may appear in the future.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of the communication device 30 proposed in this application.
  • the device 30 includes a sending unit 310 and a processing unit 320.
  • the processing unit 320 is configured to determine to close or activate the second synchronization signal and the physical broadcast channel block SSB;
  • the sending unit 310 is configured to send a third request message to the fourth network device, where the third request message carries third indication information indicating the second SSB, and the third request message is used to request the fourth network device to send the fifth network device to the fifth network device.
  • Send a fourth request message the fourth request message carries third indication information, wherein the fourth network device maintains information about at least one SSB in the third network device and information about at least one SSB in the fifth network device; In the case that the second SSB is one SSB in the third network device, the fourth request message is used to request the fifth network device to update the status of the second SSB, and the fifth network device maintains at least one of the third network devices SSB information; or, when the third network device determines to activate the second SSB, and the second SSB is one of the fifth network devices, the fourth request message is used to request the fifth network device to activate the second SSB, where the first The third network device maintains information about at least one SSB in the fifth network device.
  • the device 30 completely corresponds to the third network device in the method embodiment, and the corresponding unit of the device 30 is used to execute the corresponding steps performed by the third network device in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 4.
  • the sending unit 310 in the apparatus 30 executes the sending step of the third network device in the method embodiment. For example, perform step 220 of sending a third request message to a fourth network device in FIG. 3, or perform step 211 of sending a fifth request message to a fourth network device in FIG. 3, or perform sending to a fourth network device in FIG. Step 310 of the load report message, or perform step 332 of sending the seventh response message to the fourth network device in FIG. 4.
  • the processing unit 320 executes the steps implemented or processed inside the third network device in the method embodiment.
  • step 210 in Figure 3 for determining to close or activate the second SSB, or perform step 229 in Figure 3 for updating the state of the second SSB, or perform step 229 in Figure 4 for updating the state of the third SSB.
  • Step 331 For example, perform step 210 in Figure 3 for determining to close or activate the second SSB, or perform step 229 in Figure 3 for updating the state of the second SSB, or perform step 229 in Figure 4 for updating the state of the third SSB.
  • the apparatus 30 may further include a receiving unit 330, configured to receive information sent by other devices. For example, perform step 214 of receiving a fourth response message from the fourth network device in FIG. 3, or perform step 222 of receiving a fifth response message from the fourth network device in FIG. 3, or perform step 222 of receiving a fifth response message from the fourth network device in FIG. Step 2251 of the eleventh response message, or execute step 228 in FIG. 3 where the fourth network device sends the sixth response message, or execute step 330 in FIG. 3 where the fourth network device sends the seventh response message.
  • a receiving unit 330 configured to receive information sent by other devices. For example, perform step 214 of receiving a fourth response message from the fourth network device in FIG. 3, or perform step 222 of receiving a fifth response message from the fourth network device in FIG. 3, or perform step 222 of receiving a fifth response message from the fourth network device in FIG. Step 2251 of the eleventh response message, or execute step 228 in FIG. 3 where the fourth network device sends the sixth response message, or execute step
  • the receiving unit 330 and the sending unit 310 may constitute a transceiver unit, and have both receiving and sending functions.
  • the processing unit 320 may be a processor.
  • the transmitting unit 310 may be a transmitter.
  • the receiving unit 330 may be a receiver. The receiver and transmitter can be integrated to form a transceiver.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of a third network device 60 applicable to an embodiment of the present application, and can be used to implement the function of the third network device in the foregoing communication method.
  • the device 60 may include a processing unit 610 (that is, an example of the processing unit 320 in FIG. 9) and a storage unit 620.
  • the storage unit 620 is used to store instructions.
  • the processing unit 610 is configured to execute the instructions stored in the storage unit 620, so that the apparatus 60 implements the steps performed by the third network device in the foregoing method.
  • the device 60 may also include an input port 630 and an output port 640 (ie, an example of the sending unit 310 in FIG. 9).
  • the processing unit 610, the storage unit 620, the input port 630, and the output port 640 can communicate with each other through internal connection paths to transfer control and/or data information.
  • the storage unit 620 is used to store a computer program, and the processing unit 610 can be used to call and run the calculation program from the storage unit 620 to control the input port 630 to receive information and the output port 640 to send information to complete the above method Steps for the third network device.
  • the storage unit 620 may be integrated in the processing unit 610, or may be provided separately from the processing unit 610.
  • the input port 630 is a receiver
  • the output port 640 is a transmitter.
  • the receiver and transmitter may be the same or different physical entities. When they are the same physical entity, they can be collectively referred to as transceivers.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of the communication device 70 proposed in the present application.
  • the device 70 includes a receiving unit 410 and a sending unit 420.
  • the receiving unit 410 is configured to receive a third request message sent by a third network device, where the third request message carries third indication information indicating the second SSB, and the third request message is used to request the fourth network device to send the fifth network device to the fifth network.
  • the device sends a fourth request message, where the fourth request message carries third indication information indicating the second SSB;
  • the sending unit 420 is configured to send a fourth request message to the fifth network device, where the fourth request message is used to request the fifth network device to update the status of the second synchronization signal and the physical broadcast channel block SSB or activate the second SSB.
  • the network equipment maintains the information of at least one SSB in the third network device and the information of at least one SSB in the fifth network device; the second SSB is when the third network device determines to shut down or activate one SSB in the third network device ,
  • the fourth request message is used to request the fifth network device to update the status of the second SSB, where the fifth network device maintains information about the SSB in the third network device; or, the second SSB is determined to be activated by the third network device
  • the fourth request message is used to request the fifth network device to activate the second SSB, where the third network device maintains the information of the SSB in the fifth network device.
  • the device 40 completely corresponds to the fourth network device in the method embodiment, and the corresponding unit of the device 40 is used to execute the corresponding steps performed by the fourth network device in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 4.
  • the receiving unit 410 in the apparatus 40 executes the step of receiving by the fourth network device in the method embodiment. For example, perform step 220 of receiving a third request message sent by a third network device in FIG. 3, or perform step 211 of receiving a fifth request message sent by a third network device in FIG. 3, or perform step 211 of receiving a third network device in FIG. 4 Step 310 of the load report message sent by the device, or execute step 332 in FIG. 3 of receiving the seventh response message sent by the third network device.
  • the processing unit 220 executes the steps implemented or processed inside the fourth network device in the method embodiment. For example, step 221 for updating the state of the second SSB in FIG. 3 is performed, or step 320 for load balancing in FIG. 4 is performed.
  • the apparatus 40 may further include a sending unit 330 for sending information to other devices. For example, perform step 214 of sending a fourth response message to the third network device in FIG. 3, or perform step 222 of sending a fifth response message to the third network device in FIG. 3, or perform sending to the third network device in FIG. Step 2251 of sending the eleventh response message, or execute step 228 of sending the sixth response message to the third network device in FIG. 3, or execute step 228 of sending the seventh response message to the third network device in FIG. 4.
  • a sending unit 330 for sending information to other devices. For example, perform step 214 of sending a fourth response message to the third network device in FIG. 3, or perform step 222 of sending a fifth response message to the third network device in FIG. 3, or perform sending to the third network device in FIG. Step 2251 of sending the eleventh response message, or execute step 228 of sending the sixth response message to the third network device in FIG. 3, or execute step 228 of sending the seventh response message to the third network device in FIG. 4.
  • the receiving unit 410 and the sending unit 430 may constitute a transceiver unit, and have both receiving and sending functions.
  • the processing unit 420 may be a processor.
  • the sending unit 430 may be a transmitter.
  • the receiving unit 410 may be a receiver. The receiver and transmitter can be integrated to form a transceiver.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a fourth network device 80 applicable to an embodiment of the present application, and can be used to implement the function of the fourth network device in the foregoing communication method.
  • the device 80 may include a processing unit 710 and a storage unit 720.
  • the storage unit 720 is used to store instructions.
  • the processing unit 710 is configured to execute the instructions stored in the storage unit 720, so that the apparatus 80 implements the steps performed by the fourth network device in the above method.
  • the device 80 may also include an input port 730 (ie, an example of the receiving unit 410 in FIG. 11) and an output port 740 (ie, another example of the sending unit 420 in FIG. 11).
  • the processing unit 710, the storage unit 720, the input port 730, and the output port 740 can communicate with each other through internal connection paths to transfer control and/or data information.
  • the storage unit 720 is used to store a computer program.
  • the processing unit 710 can be used to call and run the calculation program from the storage unit 720 to control the input port 730 to receive information and the output port 740 to send information to complete the above method. Step of the fourth network device.
  • the storage unit 720 may be integrated in the processing unit 710, or may be provided separately from the processing unit 710.
  • the input port 730 is a receiver
  • the output port 740 is a transmitter.
  • the receiver and transmitter may be the same or different physical entities. When they are the same physical entity, they can be collectively referred to as transceivers.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of the communication device 90 proposed in this application.
  • the device 90 includes a receiving unit 510 and a processing unit 520.
  • the receiving unit 510 is configured to receive a fourth request message sent by the fourth network device, where the fourth request message is used to request the fifth network device to update the state of the second synchronization signal and the physical broadcast channel block SSB or activate the second SSB, where:
  • the fourth network device maintains information about at least one SSB in the third network device and information about at least one SSB in the fifth network device.
  • the third network device sends a third request message to the fourth network device to request the fourth network device.
  • the processing unit 520 is configured to update the status of the second SSB, wherein the fifth network device maintains the third network device SSB information;
  • the second SSB is when the third network device determines one SSB in the fifth network device to be activated, the processing unit 520 is configured to activate the second SSB, wherein the third network device maintains information about the SSB in the fifth network device.
  • the device 50 is completely corresponding to the fifth network device in the method embodiment, and the corresponding unit of the device 50 is used to execute the corresponding steps performed by the fifth network device in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 4.
  • the receiving unit 510 in the apparatus 50 executes the step of receiving by the fifth network device in the method embodiment. For example, perform step 223 of receiving the fourth request message sent by the fourth network device in FIG. 3, or perform step 223 of receiving the sixth request message sent by the fourth network device in FIG. 3, or perform step 223 of receiving the fourth network device in FIG. Step 333 of the tenth request message sent by the device.
  • the processing unit 520 executes the steps implemented or processed inside the fifth network device in the method embodiment. For example, step 224 for updating the state of the second SSB in FIG. 3 is performed, or step 226 for activating the second SSB in FIG. 3 is performed.
  • the apparatus 50 may further include a sending unit 530, configured to send information to other devices.
  • a sending unit 530 configured to send information to other devices. For example, perform step 213 of sending a twelfth response message to the fourth network device in FIG. 3, or perform step 225 of sending an eighth response message to the fourth network device in FIG. 3, or perform step 225 in FIG. Step 227 of sending the ninth response message, or execute step 335 of sending the thirteenth response message to the fourth network device in FIG. 4, or execute step 340 of sending the load report message to the fourth network device in FIG.
  • the receiving unit 510 and the sending unit 530 may constitute a transceiver unit, and have both receiving and sending functions.
  • the processing unit 520 may be a processor.
  • the transmitting unit 530 may be a receiver.
  • the receiving unit 510 may be a transmitter. The receiver and transmitter can be integrated to form a transceiver.
  • Fig. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of a fifth network device 100 applicable to an embodiment of the present application, which can be used to implement the function of the fifth network device in the above communication method.
  • the device 100 may include a processing unit 1010 (that is, an example of the processing unit 520 in FIG. 13) and a storage unit 1020.
  • the storage unit 1020 is used to store instructions.
  • the processing unit 1010 is configured to execute the instructions stored by the storage unit 1020, so that the apparatus 100 implements the steps performed by the fifth network device in the foregoing method.
  • the device 100 may further include an input port 1030 (ie, an example of the receiving unit 510 in FIG. 13) and an output port 1040.
  • the processing unit 1010, the storage unit 1020, the input port 1030, and the output port 1040 can communicate with each other through internal connection paths to transfer control and/or data information.
  • the storage unit 1020 is used to store a computer program.
  • the processing unit 1010 can be used to call and run the calculation program from the storage unit 1020 to control the input port 1030 to receive information and the output port 1040 to send information to complete the above method. Fifth step of network equipment.
  • the storage unit 1020 may be integrated in the processing unit 1010, or may be provided separately from the processing unit 1010.
  • the input port 1030 is a receiver
  • the output port 1040 is a transmitter.
  • the receiver and transmitter may be the same or different physical entities. When they are the same physical entity, they can be collectively referred to as transceivers.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a communication system, which includes the aforementioned one or more network devices.
  • the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium that stores instructions in the computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer executes the network device in the method shown in Figures 2 to 4 above. The various steps performed.
  • This application also provides a computer program product containing instructions.
  • the computer program product runs on a computer, the computer executes the steps performed by the network device in the method shown in Figs. 2-4.
  • This application also provides a chip including a processor.
  • the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory to execute the corresponding operation and/or process executed by the network device in the communication method provided in this application.
  • the chip further includes a memory, the memory and the processor are connected to the memory through a circuit or a wire, and the processor is used to read and execute the computer program in the memory.
  • the chip further includes a communication interface, and the processor is connected to the communication interface.
  • the communication interface is used to receive data and/or information that needs to be processed, and the processor obtains the data and/or information from the communication interface, and processes the data and/or information.
  • the communication interface can be an input and output interface.
  • the processor may be a central processing unit (CPU), a microprocessor, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or one or more of the technologies used to control the application. Integrated circuits for program execution, etc.
  • the processor may be a digital signal processor device, a microprocessor device, an analog-to-digital converter, a digital-to-analog converter, etc.
  • the processor can distribute control and signal processing functions of terminal devices or network devices among these devices according to their respective functions.
  • the processor may have a function of operating one or more software programs, and the software programs may be stored in the memory.
  • the functions of the processor can be realized by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above-mentioned functions.
  • the memory can be read-only memory (ROM), other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, random access memory (RAM), or other types that can store information and instructions
  • the dynamic storage device can also be an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), a compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM) or other optical disk storage, optical disc storage ( Including compact discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital universal discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.), magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices, or can be used to carry or store desired program codes in the form of instructions or data structures and can Any other medium accessed by the computer, etc.
  • EEPROM electrically erasable programmable read-only memory
  • CD-ROM compact disc read-only memory
  • optical disc storage Including compact discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital universal discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.
  • magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices or can be used to carry or store desired program codes in the form of instructions or data structures and can Any
  • the memory and the memory involved in the foregoing embodiments may be physically independent units, or the memory may also be integrated with the processor.
  • At least one refers to one or more
  • multiple refers to two or more.
  • And/or describes the association relationship of the associated objects, indicating that there can be three types of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean that A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone. Among them, A and B can be singular or plural.
  • the character “/” generally indicates that the associated objects are in an “or” relationship.
  • “The following at least one item” and similar expressions refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of single items or plural items.
  • At least one of a, b, and c may represent: a, b, c, a-b, a-c, b-c, or a-b-c, where a, b, and c may be single or multiple.
  • the disclosed system, device, and method may be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only illustrative, for example, the division of units is only a logical function division, and there may be other division methods in actual implementation.
  • multiple units or components can be combined or integrated into another system, or some features can be omitted or not implemented.
  • the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units can be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the technical solution of the present application.
  • each unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of this application essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the method described in each embodiment of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code .

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Mathematical Physics (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请提供了一种通信方法和通信装置。该通信方法包括：第一网络设备确定关闭或激活第一SSB之后，向第二网络设备发送第一请求消息，具体地，第一请求消息中携带有指示第一SSB的第一指示信息，在第一SSB为第一网络设备中的一个SSB的情况下，第一请求消息用于请求第二网络设备更新第一SSB的状态；或者，在激活的第一SSB为第二网络设备中的一个SSB的情况下，第一请求消息用于请求第二网络设备激活第一SSB。本申请提供的技术方案第二网络设备能够明确获知SSB的资源占用情况，能够实现第一网络设备和第二网络设备之间的资源协调。

Description

通信方法和通信装置
本申请要求于2019年02月15日提交中国专利局、申请号为201910118205.2、申请名称为“通信方法和通信装置”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及通信领域，并且更具体地，涉及一种通信方法和通信装置。
背景技术
第五代新无线(5th generation new radio，5G NR)通信系统中引入同步信号与物理广播信道块(synchronization signal and physical broadcast channel block，SSB)概念。具体地，SSB由主同步信号(primary synchronization signal，PSS)、辅同步信号(secondary synchronization signal，SSS)和物理广播信道(physical broadcast channel，PBCH)构成，在时域上占用4个符号、在频域上占用240个子载波。在一个载波的频率范围内，可以传输多个SSB，每个SSB都对应一个物理小区标识(physical cell identifier，PCI)，并且这些SSB的PCI可以相同，也可以不同。在5G通信系统中，上述的SSB能够支持终端设备执行小区搜索，例如，终端设备能够基于SSB获取系统帧的起始位置、解码PBCH获得系统信息等。并且，在一个通信系统中不同的SSB所对应的小区占用着不同的资源，例如，PCI、时频资源道等。针对一个通信系统来说SSB所对应的小区占用的资源是非常可贵的，如果能够实现通信系统中不同的网络设备中的SSB所对应的小区占用的资源协调，能够降低不同的SSB所对应的小区之间占用的资源的冲突，提高整个通信系统的性能。但是，现有技术中并没有提供多个网络设备之间针对SSB所对应的小区占用的资源进行协调的方案，因此，通信系统中多个网络设备之间如何进行SSB所对应的小区占用的资源协调成为亟待解决的问题。
发明内容
本申请提供一种通信方法和通信装置，网络设备通过在确定关闭或激活SSB之后，向其他的网络设备发送请求消息，请求其他的网络设备更新该SSB的状态或者激活该SSB，即不同的网络设备之间能够获知SSB所对应的小区占用的资源的情况，从而实现资源协调。
第一方面，提供了一种通信方法，包括：第一网络设备确定关闭或激活第一同步信号与物理广播信道块SSB；第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送第一请求消息，第一请求消息中携带有指示所述第一SSB的第一指示信息；在第一SSB为第一网络设备中的一个SSB的情况下，第一请求消息用于请求第二网络设备更新第一SSB的状态，其中，第二网络设备中维护有第一网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息；或者，在第一网络设备确定激活的 第一SSB为第二网络设备中SSB中的一个SSB的情况下，第一请求消息用于请求第二网络设备激活第一SSB，其中，第一网络设备中维护有第二网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第一网络设备在确定关闭或激活本地的第一SSB之后，向第二网络设备发送第一请求消息，请求第二网络设备更新第一SSB的状态。即第二网络设备能够获知第一SSB所对应的小区占用的资源的使用情况，若第一SSB所对应的小区占用的资源被释放的话，第二网络设备能够利用该部分资源；或者，第一网络设备在确定激活第二网络设备中的第一SSB之后，向第二网络设备发送第一请求消息，请求第二网络设备激活第一SSB，即第二网络设备能够及时利用可用的资源，从而实现资源协调，且第一请求消息中携带有指示第一SSB的第一指示信息，使得第二网络设备能够准确获知需要更新状态或需要激活的第一SSB具体为哪一个SSB，提高资源协调的准确性。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，第一指示信息包括以下信息中的至少一种信息：第一SSB的标识信息、第一SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息以及SSB的状态列表，其中，SSB的状态列表为第一SSB所属的网络设备中SSB状态信息的列表，并且SSB的状态列表中的第一SSB为休眠状态或激活状态，或者，SSB的状态列表为第一SSB的状态列表，或者，SSB的状态列表为第一SSB所属的网络设备中SSB中除第一SSB之外的剩余的SSB的状态列表。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，指示第一SSB的第一指示信息可以为多种可选的信息，提高方案的灵活性。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，第一SSB的标识信息包括：第一SSB的物理小区标识；或者，第一SSB的物理小区标识和第一SSB的射频参考频率；或者，第一SSB的物理小区标识和第一SSB的新无线绝对射频信道号码；或者，第一SSB的物理小区标识、第一SSB的新无线绝对射频信道号码和第一SSB所在的载波的工作频段；或者，第一SSB的新无线小区全球标识NCGI；或者，第一SSB的标识ID。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第一SSB的标识信息可能的形式有多种，也就是说可以通过多种信息标识SSB，为实现标识SSB提供灵活的标识方案。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，第一SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息包括以下信息中的至少一种：第一SSB所对应的小区的信道占用的物理资源块PRB的数量信息、以资源块为单位的传输带宽和子载波间隔或者第一SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽占总信道带宽的百分比。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第一SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息可能的形式有多种，也就是说可以通过多种信息指示第一SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽，为指示第一SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽提供灵活的指示方案。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，在第一SSB为第一网络设备中的一个SSB的情况下，第一网络设备关闭或激活第一SSB包括：第一网络设备基于第一网络设备中的负载信息决定关闭或激活第一SSB；或者，第一网络设备接收到关闭或激活SSB指示信息，关闭或激活SSB指示信息用于指示第一网络设备关闭或激活第一SSB。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第一网络设备可以通过多种确定方式，确定关闭 或激活第一网络设备中的第一SSB，为第一网络设备如何确定关闭或激活第一SSB提供多种选择方案，增加第一网络设备如何确定关闭或激活第一SSB的灵活性。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，在第一网络设备关闭第一SSB之前，方法还包括：第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送第二请求消息，第二请求消息用于请求将终端设备从第一网络设备切换至第二网络设备，其中，第二请求消息中携带第二指示信息，终端设备从第一网络设备切换至第二网络设备的原因是第二指示信息用于指示终端设备从所述第一网络设备切换至所述第二网络设备的原因是所述第一SSB即将关闭；第一网络设备接收第二网络设备发送的第二响应消息，第二响应消息用于指示第二网络设备中为终端设备的资源准备情况。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第一网络设备可以请求将第一网络设备中的终端设备从第一网络设备切换至第二网络设备中，其中，第二请求消息中携带有终端设备从所述第一网络设备切换至所述第二网络设备的原因是所述第一SSB即将关闭的第二指示信息，能够为第二网络设备提供第一网络设备切换终端设备的原因(cause)，使得第二网络设备决定是否接收终端设备时多一个参考因素。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：第一网络设备接收第二网络设备发送的第一响应消息，第一响应消息用于指示第二网络设备是否成功更新第一SSB的状态。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第一网络设备能够接收第二网络设备发送的第一响应消息，根据第一响应消息明确获知第二网络设备是否成功更新第一SSB的状态。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，第一响应消息用于指示第二网络设备未成功更新第一SSB的状态时，第一响应消息中携带有第一时长，用于指示第一网络设备在第一时长后能够重新发送第一请求消息。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，若第一响应消息用于指示第二网络设备未成功更新第一SSB的状态，第一响应消息中能够携带第一时长，用于指示第一网络设备在第一时长后能够重新发送第一请求消息，为第一网络设备重新发起第一请求消息提供实现方案。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，在第一SSB为第二网络设备中SSB中的一个SSB的情况下，第一网络设备确定激活第一SSB包括：第一网络设备根据第一网络设备中的负载信息确定需要激活第二网络设备中的第一SSB；或者，第一网络设备根据第一网络设备的覆盖信息确定需要激活第二网络设备中的第一SSB；或者，第一网络设备接收到激活SSB指示信息，激活SSB指示信息用于指示激活第一SSB。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第一网络设备可以根据多种确定方式，确定激活第二网络设备中SSB中的第一SSB，为第一网络设备如何确定激活第二网络设备中的第一SSB提供多种选择方案，增加第一网络设备如何确定激活第一SSB的灵活性。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：第一网络设备接收第二网络设备发送的第三响应消息，第三响应消息用于指示第二网络设备是否成功激活第一SSB。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第一网络设备能够接收第二网络设备发送的第三响应消息，根据第三响应消息明确获知第二网络设备是否成功激活第一SSB。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，第三响应消息用于指示第二网络设备成功激活第一SSB时，方法还包括：第一网络设备更新第一SSB的状态。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，若第三响应消息用于指示第二网络设备成功激活第一SSB，则第一网络设备在本地更新第一SSB的状态。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，第一网络设备中维护有第二网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息包括：第一网络设备中维护有第二网络设备中至少一个SSB的标识信息、第二网络设备中至少一个SSB的状态信息以及第二网络设备中至少一个SSB分别对应的至少一个小区的信道的带宽信息；第二网络设备中维护有第一网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息包括：第二网络设备中维护有第一网络设备中至少一个SSB的标识信息、第一网络设备中至少一个SSB的状态信息以及第一网络设备中至少一个SSB分别对应的至少一个小区的信道的带宽信息。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，网络设备中维护邻居网络设备中SSB的信息包括多种信息，能够在SSB的某个信息发生变化时，及时确定SSB的状态变更。
第二方面，提供了一种通信方法，包括：第二网络设备接收第一网络设备发送的第一请求消息，第一请求消息用于请求第二网络设备更新第一同步信号与物理广播信道块SSB的状态或激活第一SSB，第一请求消息中携带有指示第一SSB的第一指示信息；在第一SSB为第一网络设备确定关闭或激活的第一网络设备中的一个SSB的情况下，第二网络设备更新第一SSB的状态，其中，第二网络设备中维护有第一网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息；或者，在第一SSB为第一网络设备确定激活的第二网络设备中的一个SSB的情况下，第二网络设备激活第一SSB，其中，第一网络设备中维护有第二网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第二网络设备根据接收到的第一请求消息，能够获知第一网络设备侧需要激活或关闭的SSB，以及第一网络设备侧需要第二网络设备激活的SSB。也就是说，第二网络设备可以根据接收到的第一请求消息确定哪些资源会被SSB所对应的小区占用，哪些资源会被SSB释放，基于这些信息，第二网络设备和第一网络设备之间可以实现资源协调，且第一请求消息中携带有指示第一SSB的第一指示信息，使得第二网络设备能够准确获知需要更新状态或需要激活的第一SSB具体为哪一个SSB，提高资源协调的准确性。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，第一指示信息包括以下信息中的至少一种：第一SSB的标识信息、第一SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息以及SSB的状态列表，其中，SSB的状态列表为第一SSB所属的网络设备中SSB状态信息的列表，并且SSB的状态列表中的第一SSB为休眠状态或激活状态，或者，SSB的状态列表为第一SSB的状态列表，或者，SSB的状态列表为第一SSB所属的网络设备中SSB中除第一SSB之外的剩余的SSB的状态列表。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，指示第一SSB的第一指示信息可以为多种可选的信息，提高方案的灵活性。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，第一SSB的标识信息包括：第一SSB的物理小区标识；或者，第一SSB的物理小区标识和第一SSB的射频参考频率；或者，第一SSB的物理小区标识和第一SSB的新无线绝对射频信道号码；或者，第一SSB的物 理小区标识、第一SSB的新无线绝对射频信道号码和第一SSB所在的载波的工作频段；或者，第一SSB的新无线小区全球标识NCGI；或者，第一SSB的标识ID。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第一SSB的标识信息可能的形式有多种，也就是说可以通过多种信息标识SSB，为实现标识SSB提供灵活的标识方案。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中第一SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息包括以下信息中的至少一种：第一SSB所对应的小区的信道占用的物理资源块PRB的数量信息、以资源块为单位的传输带宽和子载波间隔或者第一SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽占总信道带宽的百分比。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第一SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息可能的形式有多种，也就是说可以通过多种信息指示第一SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽，为指示第一SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽提供灵活的指示方案。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，在第一SSB为第一网络设备确定关闭的第一网络设备中的一个SSB的情况下，在第二网络设备接收第一网络设备发送的第一请求消息之前，方法还包括：第二网络设备接收第一网络设备发送的第二请求消息，第二请求消息用于请求将终端设备从第一网络设备切换至第二网络设备，其中，第二请求消息中携带第二指示信息，第二指示信息用于指示终端设备从所述第一网络设备切换至所述第二网络设备的原因是所述第一SSB即将关闭；第二网络设备向第一网络设备发送第二响应消息，第二响应消息用于指示第二网络设备中为终端设备的资源准备情况。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第二网络设备可以根据接受到的第二请求消息获知第一网络设备在即将关闭第一SSB的前提下，哪些终端设备需要切换到第二网络设备中。为第二网络设备提供第一网络设备切换终端设备的原因，使得第二网络设备决定是否接收终端设备时多一个参考因素。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，在第一SSB为第一网络设备确定关闭或激活的第一网络设备中的一个SSB的情况下，方法还包括：第二网络设备向第一网络设备发送第一响应消息，第一响应消息用于指示第二网络设备是否成功更新第一SSB的状态。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第二网络设备会向第一网络设备发送第一响应消息，第一响应消息用于通知给第一网络设备该第二网络设备是否成功更新第一SSB的状态。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，第一响应消息用于指示第二网络设备未成功更新第一SSB的状态时，第一响应消息中携带有第一时长，用于指示第一网络设备在第一时长后能够重新发送第一请求消息。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，若第一响应消息用于指示第二网络设备未成功更新第一SSB的状态，第一响应消息中能够携带第一时长，用于指示第一网络设备在第一时长后能够重新发送第一请求消息，为第一网络设备重新发起第一请求消息提供实现方案。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，在第一SSB为第一网络设备确定激活的第二网络设备中的一个SSB的情况下，方法还包括：第二网络设备向第一网络设备发送第三响应消息，第三响应消息用于指示第二网络设备是否成功激活第一SSB。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第二网络设备会向第一网络设备发送第三响应消息，第三响应消息用于通知给第一网络设备该第二网络设备是否成功激活第一SSB。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，第一网络设备中维护有第二网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息包括：第一网络设备中维护有第二网络设备中至少一个SSB的标识信息、第二网络设备中SSB的状态信息以及第二网络设备中至少一个SSB分别对应的至少一个小区的信道的带宽信息；第二网络设备中维护有第一网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息包括：第二网络设备中维护有第一网络设备中至少一个SSB的标识信息、第一网络设备中至少一个SSB的状态信息以及第一网络设备中至少一个SSB分别对应的至少一个小区的信道的带宽信息。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，网络设备中维护邻居网络设备中SSB的信息包括多种信息，能够在SSB的某个信息发生变化时，及时确定SSB的状态变更。
第三方面，提供了一种通信装置，该装置可以用来执行第一方面及第一方面的任意可能的实现方式中的第一网络设备的操作。具体地，通信装置包括用于执行上述第一方面所描述的步骤或功能相对应的部件(means)可以是第一方面的第一网络设备。步骤或功能可以通过软件实现，或硬件实现，或者通过硬件和软件结合来实现。
第四方面，提供了一种通信装置，该装置可以用来用于执行第二方面及第二方面的任意可能的实现方式中的第二网络设备的操作。具体地，该通信装置可以包括用于执行上述第二方面所描述的步骤或功能相对应的部件(means)可以是第二方面的第二网络设备。步骤或功能可以通过软件实现，或硬件实现，或者通过硬件和软件结合来实现。
第五方面，提供了一种通信设备，包括，处理器，收发器，存储器，该存储器用于存储计算机程序，该收发器，用于执行第一或第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的通信方法中的收发步骤，该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序，使得该通信设备执行第一或第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的通信方法。
可选地，处理器为一个或多个，存储器为一个或多个。
可选地，存储器可以与处理器集成在一起，或者存储器与处理器分离设置。
可选的，收发器包括，发射机(发射器)和接收机(接收器)。
一个可能的设计中，提供了一种通信设备，包括收发器、处理器和存储器。该处理器用于控制收发器收发信号，该存储器用于存储计算机程序，该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序，使得该通信设备执行第一方面或第一方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
另一个可能的设计中，提供了一种通信设备，包括收发器、处理器和存储器。该处理器用于控制收发器收发信号，该存储器用于存储计算机程序，该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序，使得该通信设备执行第二方面或第二方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
第六方面，提供了一种系统，系统包括第三方面和第四方面提供的通信装置。
第七方面，提供了一种计算机程序产品，计算机程序产品包括：计算机程序(也可以称为代码，或指令)，当计算机程序被运行时，使得计算机执行上述第一方面或第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
第八方面，提供了一种计算机可读介质，计算机可读介质存储有计算机程序(也可以 称为代码，或指令)当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第一方面或第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
第九方面，提供了一种芯片系统，包括存储器和处理器，该存储器用于存储计算机程序，该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序，使得安装有该芯片系统的通信设备执行上述第一方面或第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
第十方面，提供了一种通信方法，包括：第三网络设备确定关闭或激活第二同步信号与物理广播信道块SSB；第三网络设备向第四网络设备发送第三请求消息，第三请求消息中携带有指示第二SSB的第三指示信息，第三请求消息用于请求第四网络设备向第五网络设备发送第四请求消息，第四请求消息中携带有第三指示信息，其中，第四网络设备中维护有第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息和第五网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息；在第二SSB为第三网络设备中的一个SSB的情况下，第四请求消息用于请求第五网络设备更新第二SSB的状态，其中，第五网络设备中维护有第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息；或者，在第三网络设备确定激活的第二SSB为第五网络设备中SSB中的一个SSB的情况下，第四请求消息用于请求第五网络设备激活第二SSB，其中，第三网络设备中维护有第五网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第三网络设备确定关闭或激活本地的第二SSB，或者，第三网络设备确定激活第五网络设备的第二SSB。并且第三网络设备需要将关闭或激活SSB的信息通知给第五网络设备，使得第五网络设备更新第五网络设备中维护的第三网络设备的第二SSB的状态，或者，使得第五网络设备激活第二SSB。从而实现第三网络设备和第五网络设备之间的资源协调，且第三请求消息中携带有指示第二SSB的第三指示信息，使得第四网络设备能够准确获知第三网络设备需要请求第五网络设备更新状态或需要激活的第二SSB具体为哪一个SSB，提高资源协调的准确性；第四请求消息中携带有指示第二SSB的第三指示信息，使得第五网络设备能够准确获知需要更新状态或需要激活的第二SSB具体为哪一个SSB，提高资源协调的准确性。
由于第三网络设备与第五网络设备之间无法直接进行信令交互，需要通过第三方设备(第四网络设备)转发信息。并且第四网络设备并不是仅仅执行转发信息的功能，第四网络设备中维护有第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息和第五网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息，所以第四网络设备也可以执行更新本地SSB状态的功能。
结合第十方面，在第十方面的某些实现方式中，第三指示信息包括以下信息中的至少一种：第二SSB的标识信息、第二SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息以及SSB的状态列表，其中，SSB的状态列表为第二SSB所属的网络设备中SSB状态信息的列表，并且SSB的状态列表中的第二SSB为休眠状态或激活状态，或者，SSB的状态列表为第二SSB的状态列表，或者，SSB的状态列表为第二SSB所属的网络设备中SSB中除第二SSB之外的剩余的SSB的状态列表。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，指示第二SSB的第三指示信息可以为多种可选的信息，提高方案的灵活性。
结合第十方面，在第十方面的某些实现方式中，第二SSB的标识信息包括：第二SSB的物理小区标识；或者，第二SSB的物理小区标识和第二SSB的射频参考频率；或者，第二SSB的物理小区标识和第二SSB的新无线绝对射频信道号码；或者，第二SSB的物 理小区标识、第二SSB的新无线绝对射频信道号码和第一SSB所在的载波的工作频段；或者，第二SSB的新无线小区全球标识NCGI；或者，第二SSB的标识ID。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第二SSB的标识信息可能的形式有多种，也就是说可以通过多种信息标识SSB，为实现标识SSB提供灵活的标识方案。
结合第十方面，在第十方面的某些实现方式中，第二SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息包括以下信息中的至少一种：第二SSB所对应的小区的信道占用的物理资源块PRB的数量信息、以资源块为单位的传输带宽和子载波间隔或者第二SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽占总信道带宽的百分比。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第二SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息可能的形式有多种，也就是说可以通过多种信息指示第二SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽，为指示第二SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽提供灵活的指示方案。
结合第十方面，在第十方面的某些实现方式中，在第二SSB为第三网络设备中的一个SSB的情况下，第三网络设备关闭或激活第二SSB包括：第三网络设备基于第三网络设备中的负载信息决定关闭或激活第二SSB；或者，第三网络设备接收到关闭或激活SSB指示信息，关闭或激活SSB指示信息用于指示第三网络设备关闭或激活第二SSB。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第三网络设备可以通过多种确定方式，确定关闭或激活第三网络设备中的第二SSB，为第三网络设备如何确定关闭或激活第二SSB提供多种选择方案，增加第三网络设备如何确定关闭或激活第二SSB的灵活性。
结合第十方面，在第十方面的某些实现方式中，在第三网络设备关闭第二SSB之前，方法还包括：第三网络设备向第四网络设备发送第五请求消息，第五请求消息用于请求第四网络设备向第五网络设备发送第六请求消息，其中，第五请求消息中携带第四指示信息；第六请求消息用于请求将终端设备从第三网络设备切换至第五网络设备，第六请求消息中携带第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示所述终端设备从所述第三网络设备切换至所述第五网络设备的原因是所述第二SSB即将关闭；第三网络设备接收第四网络设备发送的第四响应消息，第四响应消息用于指示第五网络设备中为终端设备的资源准备情况。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第三网络设备可以请求将第三网络设备中的终端设备从第三网络设备切换至第五网络设备中，其中，第五请求消息中携带有指示所述终端设备从所述第三网络设备切换至所述第五网络设备的原因是所述第二SSB即将关闭的第四指示信息，第四网络设备根据第五请求消息向第五网络设备发送的第六请求消息中也携带该第四指示信息，能够为第五网络设备提供第三网络设备切换终端设备的原因，使得第五网络设备决定是否接收终端设备时多一个参考因素。
结合第十方面，在第十方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：第三网络设备接收第四网络设备发送的第五响应消息，第五响应消息用于指示第四网络设备是否成功更新第二SSB的状态。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，由于第四网络设备也会执行更新第二SSB的状态的动作，则第三网络设备能够接收第四网络设备发送的第五响应消息，根据第五响应消息明确获知第四网络设备是否成功更新第二SSB的状态。
结合第十方面，在第十方面的某些实现方式中，第五响应消息用于指示第四网络设备未成功更新第二SSB的状态时，第五响应消息中携带有第二时长，用于指示第三网络设 备在第二时长后能够重新发送第三请求消息。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，若第五响应消息用于指示第四网络设备未成功更新第二SSB的状态，第五响应消息中能够携带第二时长，用于指示第三网络设备在第二时长后能够重新发送第三请求消息，为第三网络设备重新发起第三请求消息提供实现方案。
结合第十方面，在第十方面的某些实现方式中，在第二SSB为第五网络设备中SSB中的一个SSB的情况下，第三网络设备确定激活第二SSB包括：第三网络设备根据第三网络设备中的负载信息确定需要激活第五网络设备中的第二SSB；或者，第三网络设备根据第三网络设备的覆盖信息确定需要激活第五网络设备中的第二SSB；或者，第三网络设备接收到激活SSB指示信息，激活SSB指示信息用于指示激活第二SSB。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第三网络设备可以根据多种确定方式，确定激活第五网络设备中SSB中的第二SSB，为第三网络设备如何确定激活第五网络设备中的第二SSB提供多种选择方案，增加第三网络设备如何确定激活第二SSB的灵活性。
结合第十方面，在第十方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：第三网络设备接收第四网络设备发送的第六响应消息，第六响应消息用于指示第五网络设备是否成功激活第二SSB。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第三网络设备能够接收第四网络设备发送的第六响应消息，根据第六响应消息明确获知第五网络设备是否成功激活第二SSB。
结合第十方面，在第十方面的某些实现方式中，第六响应消息用于指示第五网络设备成功更新第二SSB时，方法还包括：第三网络设备更新第二SSB的状态。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，若第六响应消息用于指示第五网络设备成功激活第二SSB，则第三网络设备在本地更新第二SSB的状态。
结合第十方面，在第十方面的某些实现方式中，第三网络设备中维护有第五网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息包括：第三网络设备中维护有第五网络设备中至少一个SSB的标识信息、第五网络设备中至少一个SSB的状态信息以及第五网络设备中至少一个SSB分别对应的至少一个小区的信道的带宽信息；第五网络设备中维护有第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息包括：第五网络设备中维护有第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的标识信息、第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的状态信息以及第三网络设备中至少一个SSB分别对应的至少一个小区的信道的带宽信息；第四网络设备中维护有第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息和第五网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息包括：第四网络设备中维护有第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息的标识信息和第五网络设备备中至少一个SSB的标识信息、第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息的状态信息和第五网络设备中至少一个SSB的状态信息以及第三网络设备至少一个SSB分别对应的至少一个小区的信道的带宽信息和第五网络设备中至少一个SSB分别对应的至少一个小区的信道的带宽信息。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，网络设备中维护邻居网络设备中SSB的信息包括多种信息，能够在SSB的某个信息发生变化时，及时确定SSB的状态变更。
第十一方面，提供了一种通信方法，包括：第四网络设备接收第三网络设备发送的第三请求消息，第三请求消息中携带有指示第二SSB的第三指示信息，第三请求消息用于请求第四网络设备向第五网络设备发送第四请求消息；第四网络设备向第五网络设备发送 第四请求消息，第四请求消息中携带有第三指示信息，第四请求消息用于请求第五网络设备更新第二同步信号与物理广播信道块SSB的状态或激活第二SSB，其中，第四网络设备中维护有第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息和第五网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息；在第二SSB为第三网络设备确定关闭或激活的第三网络设备中的一个SSB的情况下，第四请求消息用于请求第五网络设备更新第二SSB的状态，其中，第五网络设备中维护有第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息；或者，在第二SSB为第三网络设备确定激活的第五网络设备中的一个SSB的情况下，第四请求消息用于请求第五网络设备激活第二SSB，其中，第三网络设备中维护有第五网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第三网络设备确定关闭或激活本地的第二SSB，或者，第三网络设备确定激活第五网络设备的第二SSB。并且第三网络设备需要将关闭或激活SSB的信息通知给第五网络设备，使得第五网络设备更新第五网络设备中维护的第三网络设备的第二SSB的状态，或者，使得第五网络设备激活第二SSB。从而实现第三网络设备和第五网络设备之间的资源协调，且第三请求消息中携带有指示第二SSB的第三指示信息，使得第四网络设备能够准确获知第三网络设备需要请求第五网络设备更新状态或需要激活的第二SSB具体为哪一个SSB，提高资源协调的准确性；第四请求消息中携带有指示第二SSB的第三指示信息，使得第五网络设备能够准确获知需要更新状态或需要激活的第二SSB具体为哪一个SSB，提高资源协调的准确性。
由于第三网络设备与第五网络设备之间无法直接进行信令交互，需要通过第三方设备(第四网络设备)转发信息。并且第四网络设备并不是仅仅执行转发信息的功能，第四网络设备中维护有第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息和第五网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息，所以第四网络设备也可以执行更新本地SSB状态的功能。
结合第十一方面，在第十一方面的某些实现方式中，第三指示信息包括以下信息中的至少一种：
第二SSB的标识信息、第二SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息以及SSB的状态列表，其中，SSB的状态列表为第二SSB所属的网络设备中SSB状态信息的列表，并且SSB的状态列表中的第二SSB为休眠状态或激活状态，或者，SSB的状态列表为第二SSB的状态列表，或者，SSB的状态列表为第二SSB所属的网络设备中SSB中除第二SSB之外的剩余的SSB的状态列表。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，指示第二SSB的第三指示信息可以为多种可选的信息，提高方案的灵活性。
结合第十一方面，在第十一方面的某些实现方式中，第二SSB的标识信息包括：第二SSB的物理小区标识；或者，第二SSB的物理小区标识和第二SSB的射频参考频率；或者，第二SSB的物理小区标识和第二SSB的新无线绝对射频信道号码；或者，第二SSB的物理小区标识、第二SSB的新无线绝对射频信道号码和第一SSB所在的载波的工作频段；或者，第二SSB的新无线小区全球标识NCGI；或者，第二SSB的标识ID。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第二SSB的标识信息可能的形式有多种，也就是说可以通过多种信息标识SSB，为实现标识SSB提供灵活的标识方案。
结合第十一方面，在第十一方面的某些实现方式中，第二SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息包括以下信息中的至少一种：第二SSB所对应的小区的信道占用的物理资源块 PRB的数量信息、以资源块为单位的传输带宽和子载波间隔或者第二SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽占总信道带宽的百分比。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第二SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息可能的形式有多种，也就是说可以通过多种信息指示第二SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽，为指示第二SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽提供灵活的指示方案。
结合第十一方面，在第十一方面的某些实现方式中，在第二SSB为第三网络设备确定关闭的第三网络设备中的一个SSB的情况下，在第四网络设备接收第三网络设备发送的第三请求消息之前，方法还包括：第四网络设备接收第三网络设备发送的第五请求消息，第五请求消息用于请求第四网络设备向第五网络设备发送第六请求消息，其中，第五请求消息中携带第四指示信息；第四网络设备向第五网络设备发送第六请求消息，第六请求消息用于请求将终端设备从第三网络设备切换至第五网络设备，第六请求消息中携带第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示所述终端设备从所述第三网络设备切换至所述第五网络设备的原因是所述第二SSB即将关闭；第四网络设备向第三网络设备发送第四响应消息，第四响应消息用于指示第五网络设备中为终端设备的资源准备情况。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第三网络设备可以请求将第三网络设备中的终端设备从第三网络设备切换至第五网络设备中，其中，第五请求消息中携带有指示所述终端设备从所述第三网络设备切换至所述第五网络设备的原因是所述第二SSB即将关闭的第四指示信息，第四网络设备根据第五请求消息向第五网络设备发送的第六请求消息中也携带该第四指示信息，能够为第五网络设备提供第三网络设备切换终端设备的原因，使得第五网络设备决定是否接收终端设备时多一个参考因素。
结合第十一方面，在第十一方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：第四网络设备更新第二SSB的状态；第四网络设备向第三网络设备发送第五响应消息，第五响应消息用于指示第四网络设备是否成功更新第二SSB的状态。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，由于第四网络设备也会执行更新第二SSB的状态的动作，则第三网络设备能够接收第四网络设备发送的第五响应消息，根据第五响应消息明确获知第四网络设备是否成功更新第二SSB的状态。
结合第十一方面，在第十一方面的某些实现方式中，第五响应消息用于指示第四网络设备未成功更新第二SSB的状态时，第五响应消息中携带有第二时长，用于指示第三网络设备在第二时长后能够重新发送第三请求消息。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，若第五响应消息用于指示第四网络设备未成功更新第二SSB的状态，第五响应消息中能够携带第二时长，用于指示第三网络设备在第二时长后能够重新发送第三请求消息，为第三网络设备重新发起第三请求消息提供实现方案。
结合第十一方面，在第十一方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：第四网络设备向第三网络设备发送的第六响应消息，第六响应消息用于指示第五网络设备是否成功激活第二SSB。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第四网络设备向第三网络设备发送第六响应消息，第六响应消息用于指示第五网络设备是否成功激活第二SSB。
结合第十一方面，在第十一方面的某些实现方式中，第三网络设备中维护有第五网络 设备中至少一个SSB的信息包括：第三网络设备中维护有第五网络设备中至少一个SSB的标识信息、第五网络设备中至少一个SSB的状态信息以及第五网络设备中至少一个SSB分别对应的至少一个小区的信道的带宽信息；第五网络设备中维护有第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息包括：第五网络设备中维护有第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的标识信息、第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的状态信息以及第三网络设备中至少一个SSB分别对应的至少一个小区的信道的带宽信息；第四网络设备中维护有第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息和第五网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息包括：第四网络设备中维护有第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的标识信息和第五网络设备备中至少一个SSB的标识信息、第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的状态信息和第五网络设备中至少一个SSB的状态信息以及第三网络设备中至少一个SSB分别对应的至少一个小区的信道的带宽信息和第五网络设备中至少一个SSB分别对应的至少一个小区的信道的带宽信息。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，网络设备中维护邻居网络设备中SSB的信息包括多种信息，能够在SSB的某个信息发生变化时，及时确定SSB的状态变更。
第十二方面，提供了一种通信方法，第五网络设备接收第四网络设备发送的第四请求消息，第四请求消息用于请求第五网络设备更新第二同步信号与物理广播信道块SSB的状态或激活第二SSB，第四请求消息中携带有指示第二SSB的第三指示信息，其中，第四网络设备中维护有第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的状态信息和第五网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息，第三网络设备为向第四网络设备发送第三请求消息，第三请求消息中携带有第三指示信息，请求第四网络设备向第五网络设备发送第四请求消息的网络设备；第二SSB为第三网络设备确定关闭或激活的第三网络设备中的一个SSB时，第五网络设备更新第二SSB的状态，其中，第五网络设备中维护有第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息；或者，第二SSB为第三网络设备确定激活的第五网络设备中的一个SSB时，第五网络设备激活第二SSB，其中，第三网络设备中维护有第五网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第三网络设备确定关闭或激活本地的第二SSB，或者，第三网络设备确定激活第五网络设备的第二SSB。并且第三网络设备需要将关闭或激活SSB的信息通知给第五网络设备，使得第五网络设备更新第五网络设备中维护的第三网络设备的SSB的状态，或者，使得第五网络设备激活SSB。从而实现第三网络设备和第五网络设备之间的资源协调，且第三请求消息中携带有指示第二SSB的第三指示信息，使得第四网络设备能够准确获知第三网络设备需要请求第五网络设备更新状态或需要激活的第二SSB具体为哪一个SSB，提高资源协调的准确性；第四请求消息中携带有指示第二SSB的第三指示信息，使得第五网络设备能够准确获知需要更新状态或需要激活的第二SSB具体为哪一个SSB，提高资源协调的准确性。
由于第三网络设备与第五网络设备之间无法直接进行信令交互，需要通过第三方设备(第四网络设备)转发信息。并且第四网络设备并不是仅仅执行转发信息的功能，第四网络设备中维护有第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的状态信息和第五网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息，所以第四网络设备也可以执行更新本地SSB状态的功能。
结合第十二方面，在第十二方面的某些实现方式中，第三指示信息包括以下信息中的至少一种：第二SSB的标识信息、第二SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息以及SSB的状 态列表，其中，SSB的状态列表为第二SSB所属的网络设备中SSB状态信息的列表，并且SSB的状态列表中的第二SSB为休眠状态或激活状态，或者，SSB的状态列表为第二SSB的状态列表，或者，SSB的状态列表为第二SSB所属的网络设备中SSB中除第二SSB之外的剩余的SSB的状态列表。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，指示第二SSB的第三指示信息可以为多种可选的信息，提高方案的灵活性。
结合第十二方面，在第十二方面的某些实现方式中，第二SSB的标识信息包括：第二SSB的物理小区标识；或者，第二SSB的物理小区标识和第二SSB的射频参考频率；或者，第二SSB的物理小区标识和第二SSB的新无线绝对射频信道号码；或者，第二SSB的物理小区标识、第二SSB的新无线绝对射频信道号码和第一SSB所在的载波的工作频段；或者，第二SSB的新无线小区全球标识NCGI；或者，第二SSB的标识ID。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第二SSB的标识信息可能的形式有多种，也就是说可以通过多种信息标识SSB，为实现标识SSB提供灵活的标识方案。
结合第十二方面，在第十二方面的某些实现方式中，第二SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息包括以下信息中的至少一种：第二SSB所对应的小区的信道占用的物理资源块PRB的数量信息、以资源块为单位的带宽和子载波间隔或者第二SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽占总信道带宽的百分比。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第二SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息可能的形式有多种，也就是说可以通过多种信息指示第二SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽，为指示第二SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽提供灵活的指示方案。
结合第十二方面，在第十二方面的某些实现方式中，在第二SSB为第三网络设备确定关闭的第三网络设备中的一个SSB的情况下，在第五网络设备接收第四网络设备发送的第四请求消息之前，方法还包括：第五网络设备接收第四网络设备发送的第六请求消息，第六请求消息用于请求将终端设备从第三网络设备切换至第五网络设备，第六请求消息中携带第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示所述终端设备从所述第三网络设备切换至所述第五网络设备的原因是所述第二SSB即将关闭；第五网络设备向第四网络设备发送第十二响应消息，第十二响应消息用于指示第五网络设备中为终端设备的资源准备情况。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第三网络设备可以请求将第三网络设备中的终端设备从第三网络设备切换至第五网络设备中，其中，第五请求消息中携带有指示所述终端设备从所述第三网络设备切换至所述第五网络设备的原因是所述第二SSB即将关闭的第四指示信息，第四网络设备根据第五请求消息向第五网络设备发送的第六请求消息中也携带该第四指示信息，能够为第五网络设备提供第三网络设备切换终端设备的原因，使得第五网络设备决定是否接收终端设备时多一个参考因素。
结合第十二方面，在第十二方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：第五网络设备向第四网络设备发送第八响应消息，第八响应消息用于指示第五网络设备是否成功更新第二SSB的状态。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第四网络设备能够接收第五网络设备发送的第八响应消息，第八响应消息明用于指示第五网络设备是否成功更新第二SSB的状态。
结合第十二方面，在第十二方面的某些实现方式中，第八响应消息用于指示第五网络 设备未成功更新第二SSB的状态时，第八响应消息中携带有第三时长，用于指示第四网络设备在第三时长后能够重新发送第四请求消息。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第八响应消息用于指示第四网络设备未成功更新第二SSB的状态时，第八响应消息中携带有第三时长，用于指示第四网络设备在第三时长后能够重新发送第四请求消息。
结合第十二方面，在第十二方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：第五网络设备向第四网络设备发送的第九响应消息，第九响应消息用于指示第五网络设备是否成功激活第二SSB。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第五网络设备向第四网络设备发送第九响应消息，第九响应消息用于指示第五网络设备是否成功激活第二SSB。
结合第十二方面，在第十二方面的某些实现方式中，第三网络设备中维护有第五网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息包括：第三网络设备中维护有第五网络设备中至少一个SSB的标识信息、第五网络设备中至少一个SSB的状态信息以及第五网络设备中至少一个SSB分别对应的至少一个小区的信道的带宽信息；第五网络设备中维护有第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息包括：第五网络设备中维护有第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的标识信息、第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的状态信息以及第三网络设备中至少一个SSB分别对应的至少一个小区的信道的带宽信息；第四网络设备中维护有第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息和第五网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息包括：第四网络设备中维护有第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的标识信息和第五网络设备备中至少一个SSB的标识信息、第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的状态信息和第五网络设备中至少一个SSB的状态信息以及第三网络设备中至少一个SSB分别对应的至少一个小区的信道的带宽信息和第五网络设备中至少一个SSB分别对应的至少一个小区的信道的带宽信息。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，网络设备中维护邻居网络设备中SSB的信息包括多种信息，能够在SSB的某个信息发生变化时，及时确定SSB的状态变更。
第十三方面，提供了一种通信装置，该装置可以用来执行第十方面及第十方面的任意可能的实现方式中的第三网络设备的操作。具体地，通信装置包括用于执行上述第十方面所描述的步骤或功能相对应的部件(means)可以是第十方面的第三网络设备。步骤或功能可以通过软件实现，或硬件实现，或者通过硬件和软件结合来实现。
第十四方面，提供了一种通信装置，该装置可以用来用于执行第十一方面及第十一方面的任意可能的实现方式中的第四网络设备的操作。具体地，该通信装置可以包括用于执行上述第十一方面所描述的步骤或功能相对应的部件(means)可以是第十一方面的第四网络设备。步骤或功能可以通过软件实现，或硬件实现，或者通过硬件和软件结合来实现。
第十五方面，提供了一种通信装置，该装置可以用来用于执行第十二方面及第十二方面的任意可能的实现方式中的第四网络设备的操作。具体地，该通信装置可以包括用于执行上述第十二方面所描述的步骤或功能相对应的部件(means)可以是第十二方面的第五网络设备。步骤或功能可以通过软件实现，或硬件实现，或者通过硬件和软件结合来实现。
第十六方面，提供了一种通信设备，包括，处理器，收发器，存储器，该存储器用于存储计算机程序，该收发器，用于执行第十至第十二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的通信方法中的收发步骤，该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序，使得该通信设备 执行第十至第十二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的通信方法。
可选地，处理器为一个或多个，存储器为一个或多个。
可选地，存储器可以与处理器集成在一起，或者存储器与处理器分离设置。
可选的，收发器包括，发射机(发射器)和接收机(接收器)。
一个可能的设计中，提供了一种通信设备，包括收发器、处理器和存储器。该处理器用于控制收发器收发信号，该存储器用于存储计算机程序，该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序，使得该通信设备执行第十方面或第十方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
另一个可能的设计中，提供了一种通信设备，包括收发器、处理器和存储器。该处理器用于控制收发器收发信号，该存储器用于存储计算机程序，该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序，使得该通信设备执行第十一方面或第十一方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
另一个可能的设计中，提供了一种通信设备，包括收发器、处理器和存储器。该处理器用于控制收发器收发信号，该存储器用于存储计算机程序，该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序，使得该通信设备执行第十二方面或第十二方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
第十七方面，提供了一种系统，系统包括第十三方面至第十五方面提供的通信装置。
第十八方面，提供了一种计算机程序产品，计算机程序产品包括：计算机程序(也可以称为代码，或指令)，当计算机程序被运行时，使得计算机执行上述第十方面至第十二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
第十九方面，提供了一种计算机可读介质，计算机可读介质存储有计算机程序(也可以称为代码，或指令)当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第十方面至第十二方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
第二十方面，提供了一种芯片系统，包括存储器和处理器，该存储器用于存储计算机程序，该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序，使得安装有该芯片系统的通信设备执行上述第十方面至第十二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
第二十一方面，提供了一种通信方法，第三网络设备向第四网络设备发送负载报告消息，负载报告消息用于指示第三网络设备中的SSB所对应的小区的负载情况，其中，第四网络设备中维护有第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息；第三网络设备接收第四网络设备发送的第七请求消息，第七请求消息用于指示第三网络设备关闭或激活第三同步信号与物理广播信道块SSB。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第三网络设备可以向第四网络设备发送负载报告消息，通知第三网络设备中的负载情况，使得第四网络设备可以基于第三网络设备中的负载情况决定激活或关闭第三网络设备中的第三SSB，或者决定激活或关闭第五网络设备中的第三SSB，第五网络设备为第三网络设备的邻居网络设备，实现负载均衡。
结合第二十一方面，在第二十一方面的某些实现方式中，负载报告消息包括第三网络设备中的一个或多个SSB信息，以及所述一个或多个SSB所对应的小区负载信息，一个或多个SSB信息分别用于指示该一个或多个SSB。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，为了明确通知第三网络设备中的负载情况，负载 报告消息中包括第三网络设备中至少一个SSB信息，以及该至少一个SSB所对应的小区负载信息。基于该SSB信息能够准确确定该SSB，根据该SSB所对应的小区负载信息进一步确定该SSB所对应的小区的负载情况。
应理解，SSB信息包括SSB的标识信息。例如，SSB的ID、SSB的PCI等。
结合第二十一方面，在第二十一方面的某些实现方式中，SSB的标识包括：SSB的物理小区标识；或者，SSB的物理小区标识和SSB的射频参考频率；或者，SSB的物理小区标识和SSB的新无线绝对射频信道号码；或者，SSB的物理小区标识、SSB的新无线绝对射频信道号码和SSB所在的载波的工作频段；或者，SSB的新无线小区全球标识NCGI；或者，SSB的标识ID。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，SSB的标识信息可能的形式有多种，也就是说可以通过多种信息标识SSB，为实现标识SSB提供灵活的标识方案。
结合第二十一方面，在第二十一方面的某些实现方式中，负载信息包括以下信息中的至少一个：SSB的无线资源利用率信息、SSB的硬件负载指标、SSB的软件负载指标，SSB的容量值以及SSB的过载状态指示信息，SSB的过载状态指示信息用于指示SSB处于过载状态或者非过载状态。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，SSB所对应的小区负载信息可能的形式有多种，也就是说可以通过多种信息确定SSB所对应的小区的负载情况，为确定SSB所对应的小区负载情况提供灵活的方案。
结合第二十一方面，在第二十一方面的某些实现方式中，第七请求消息中包括第三SSB的第五指示信息，第五指示信息可以是以下信息中的至少一种信息：第三SSB的标识信息、第三SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息以及SSB的状态列表，其中，SSB的状态列表为第三网络设备中SSB状态信息的列表，并且SSB的状态列表中的第三SSB为休眠状态，或者，SSB的状态列表为第三SSB的状态列表，或者，SSB的状态列表为第三网络设备中SSB中除第三SSB之外的剩余的SSB的状态列表。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，通过在第七请求消息中携带有指示第三SSB的第五指示信息，使得第三网络设备能够准确获知第四网络设备需要指示第三网络设备关闭或激活的第三SSB具体为哪一个SSB，提高负载均衡的准确性。
结合第二十一方面，在第二十一方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：第三SSB的标识信息包括：第三SSB的物理小区标识；或者，第三SSB的物理小区标识和第三SSB的射频参考频率；或者，第三SSB的物理小区标识和第三SSB的新无线绝对射频信道号码；或者，第三SSB的物理小区标识、第三SSB的新无线绝对射频信道号码和第一SSB所在的载波的工作频段；或者，第三SSB的新无线小区全球标识NCGI；或者，第三SSB的标识ID。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第三SSB的标识信息可能的形式有多种，也就是说可以通过多种信息标识SSB，为实现标识SSB提供灵活的标识方案。
结合第二十一方面，在第二十一方面的某些实现方式中，第三SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息包括以下信息中的至少一种信息：第三SSB所对应的小区的信道占用的物理资源块PRB的数量信息、以资源块为单位的传输带宽和子载波间隔或者第三SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽占总信道带宽的百分比。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第三SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息可能的形式有多种，也就是说可以通过多种信息指示第三SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽，为指示第三SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽提供灵活的指示方案。
结合第二十一方面，在第二十一方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：第三网络设备向第四网络设备发送第七响应消息，第七响应消息用于指示第三SSB是否成功关闭或者激活。
结合第二十一方面，在第二十一方面的某些实现方式中，第四网络设备中维护有第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息包括：第四网络设备中维护有第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的标识信息、第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的状态信息以及第三网络设备中至少一个SSB分别对应的至少一个小区的信道的带宽信息。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第四网络设备中维护邻居网络设备中SSB的信息包括多种信息，能够在SSB的某个信息发生变化时，及时确定SSB的状态变更。
第二十二方面，提供了一种通信方法，第四网络设备接收第三网络设备发送的负载报告消息，负载报告消息用于指示第三网络设备中的SSB所对应的小区的负载情况，其中，第四网络设备中维护有第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息；第四网络设备向第三网络设备发送第七请求消息，第七请求消息用于指示第三网络设备关闭或激活第三同步信号与物理广播信道块SSB。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第四网络设备接收第三网络设备发送的负载报告消息，根据该负载报告消息获知第三网络设备中的负载情况，使得第四网络设备可以基于第三网络设备中的负载情况决定激活或关闭第三网络设备中的第三SSB，或者决定激活或关闭第五网络设备中的第三SSB，实现负载均衡。
结合第二十二方面，在第二十二方面的某些实现方式中，负载报告消息包括第三网络设备中的一个或多个SSB信息，该一个或多个SSB所对应的小区负载信息。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，为了明确通知第三网络设备中的负载情况，负载报告消息中包括第三网络设备中至少一个SSB信息，以及该至少一个SSB所对应的小区负载信息。基于该SSB信息能够准确确定该SSB，根据该SSB所对应的小区负载信息进一步确定该SSB所对应的小区的负载情况。
结合第二十二方面，在第二十二方面的某些实现方式中，SSB的标识包括：SSB的物理小区标识；或者，SSB的物理小区标识和SSB的射频参考频率；或者，SSB的物理小区标识和SSB的新无线绝对射频信道号码；或者，SSB的物理小区标识、SSB的新无线绝对射频信道号码和SSB所在的载波的工作频段；或者，SSB的新无线小区全球标识NCGI；或者，SSB的标识ID。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，SSB的标识信息可能的形式有多种，也就是说可以通过多种信息标识SSB，为实现标识SSB提供灵活的标识方案。
结合第二十二方面，在第二十二方面的某些实现方式中，负载信息包括以下信息中的至少一个：SSB的无线资源利用率信息、SSB的硬件负载指标、SSB的软件负载指标，SSB的容量值以及SSB的过载状态指示信息，SSB的过载状态指示信息用于指示SSB处于过载状态或者非过载状态。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，SSB所对应的小区负载信息可能的形式有多种， 也就是说可以通过多种信息确定SSB所对应的小区的负载情况，为确定SSB所对应的小区负载情况提供灵活的方案。
结合第二十二方面，在第二十二方面的某些实现方式中，第七请求消息中包括第三SSB的第五指示信息，第五指示信息可以是以下信息中的至少一种信息：第三SSB的标识信息、第三SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息以及SSB的状态列表，其中，SSB的状态列表为第三网络设备中SSB状态信息的列表，并且SSB的状态列表中的第三SSB为休眠状态，或者，SSB的状态列表为第三SSB的状态列表，或者，SSB的状态列表为第三网络设备中SSB中除第三SSB之外的剩余的SSB的状态列表。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，通过在第七请求消息中携带有指示第三SSB的第五指示信息，使得第三网络设备能够准确获知第四网络设备需要指示第三网络设备关闭或激活的第三SSB具体为哪一个SSB，提高负载均衡的准确性。
结合第二十二方面，在第二十二方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：第三SSB的标识信息包括：第三SSB的物理小区标识；或者，第三SSB的物理小区标识和第三SSB的射频参考频率；或者，第三SSB的物理小区标识和第三SSB的新无线绝对射频信道号码；或者，第三SSB的物理小区标识、第三SSB的新无线绝对射频信道号码和第一SSB所在的载波的工作频段；或者，第三SSB的新无线小区全球标识NCGI；或者，第三SSB的标识ID。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第三SSB的标识信息可能的形式有多种，也就是说可以通过多种信息标识SSB，为实现标识SSB提供灵活的标识方案。
结合第二十二方面，在第二十二方面的某些实现方式中，第三SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息包括以下信息中的至少一种信息：第三SSB所对应的小区的信道占用的物理资源块PRB的数量信息、以资源块为单位的传输带宽和子载波间隔或者第三SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽占总信道带宽的百分比。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第三SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息可能的形式有多种，也就是说可以通过多种信息指示第三SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽，为指示第三SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽提供灵活的指示方案。
结合第二十二方面，在第二十二方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：第三网络设备向第四网络设备发送第七响应消息，第七响应消息用于指示第三SSB是否成功关闭或者激活。
结合第二十二方面，在第二十二方面的某些实现方式中，第四网络设备中维护有第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息包括：第四网络设备中维护有第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的标识信息、第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的状态信息以及第三网络设备中至少一个SSB分别对应的至少一个小区的信道的带宽信息。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第四网络设备中维护邻居网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息包括多种信息，能够在SSB的某个信息发生变化时，及时确定SSB的状态变更。
第二十三方面，提供了一种通信装置，该装置可以用来执行第二十一方面及第二十一方面的任意可能的实现方式中的第三网络设备的操作。具体地，通信装置包括用于执行上述第二十一方面所描述的步骤或功能相对应的部件(means)可以是第二十一方面的第三 网络设备。步骤或功能可以通过软件实现，或硬件实现，或者通过硬件和软件结合来实现。
第二十四方面，提供了一种通信装置，该装置可以用来用于执行第二十二方面及第二十二方面的任意可能的实现方式中的第四网络设备的操作。具体地，该通信装置可以包括用于执行上述第二十二方面所描述的步骤或功能相对应的部件(means)可以是第二十二方面的第四网络设备。步骤或功能可以通过软件实现，或硬件实现，或者通过硬件和软件结合来实现。
第二十五方面，提供了一种通信设备，包括，处理器，收发器，存储器，该存储器用于存储计算机程序，该收发器，用于执行第二十一或第二十二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的通信方法中的收发步骤，该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序，使得该通信设备执行第二十一或第二十二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的通信方法。
可选地，处理器为一个或多个，存储器为一个或多个。
可选地，存储器可以与处理器集成在一起，或者存储器与处理器分离设置。
可选的，收发器包括，发射机(发射器)和接收机(接收器)。
一个可能的设计中，提供了一种通信设备，包括收发器、处理器和存储器。该处理器用于控制收发器收发信号，该存储器用于存储计算机程序，该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序，使得该通信设备执行第二十一方面或第二十一方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
另一个可能的设计中，提供了一种通信设备，包括收发器、处理器和存储器。该处理器用于控制收发器收发信号，该存储器用于存储计算机程序，该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序，使得该通信设备执行第二十二方面或第二十二方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
第二十六方面，提供了一种系统，系统包括第二十三或第二十四方面提供的通信装置。
第二十七方面，提供了一种计算机程序产品，计算机程序产品包括：计算机程序(也可以称为代码，或指令)，当计算机程序被运行时，使得计算机执行上述第二十一或第二十二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
第二十八方面，提供了一种计算机可读介质，计算机可读介质存储有计算机程序(也可以称为代码，或指令)当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第二十一或第二十二方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
第二十九方面，提供了一种芯片系统，包括存储器和处理器，该存储器用于存储计算机程序，该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序，使得安装有该芯片系统的通信设备执行上述第二十一或第二十二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
第三十方面，提供了一种通信方法，包括：第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送第二请求消息，第二请求消息用于请求将终端设备从第一网络设备切换至第二网络设备，其中，第二请求消息中携带第二指示信息，第二指示信息用于指示第一网络设备中的第一同步信号与物理广播信道块SSB即将被关闭，第二网络设备中维护有第一网络设备中至少一个至少一个SSB的信息；第一网络设备接收第二网络设备发送的第二响应消息，第二响应消息用于指示第二网络设备中为终端设备的资源准备情况。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第一网络设备可以请求将第一网络设备中的终端设备从第一网络设备切换至第二网络设备中，其中，第二请求消息中携带有终端设备从所 述第一网络设备切换至所述第二网络设备的原因是所述第一SSB即将关闭的第二指示信息，能够为第二网络设备提供第一网络设备切换终端设备的原因，使得第二网络设备决定是否接收终端设备时多一个参考因素。
结合第三十方面，在第三十方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：第一网络设备关闭第一SSB；第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送第一请求消息，第一请求消息用于请求第二网络设备更新第一SSB的状态，第一请求消息中携带有指示所述第一SSB的第一指示信息；其中，第二网络设备中维护有第一网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第一网络设备在确定关闭本地的第一SSB之后，向第二网络设备发送第一请求消息，请求第二网络设备更新第一SSB的状态。即第二网络设备能够获知第一SSB所对应的小区占用的资源的使用情况，若第一SSB所对应的小区占用的资源被释放的话，第二网络设备能够利用该部分资源，且第一请求消息中携带有指示第一SSB的第一指示信息，使得第二网络设备能够准确获知需要更新状态或需要激活的第一SSB具体为哪一个SSB，提高资源协调的准确性。
结合第三十方面，在第三十方面的某些实现方式中，第一指示信息包括以下信息中的至少一种：第一SSB的标识信息、第一SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息以及SSB的状态列表，其中，SSB的状态列表为第一SSB所属的网络设备中SSB状态信息的列表，并且SSB的状态列表中的第一SSB为休眠状态或激活状态，或者，SSB的状态列表为第一SSB的状态列表，或者，SSB的状态列表为第一SSB所属的网络设备中SSB中除第一SSB之外的剩余的SSB的状态列表。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，指示第一SSB的第一指示信息可以为多种可选的信息，提高方案的灵活性。
结合第三十方面，在第三十方面的某些实现方式中，第一SSB的标识信息包括：第一SSB的物理小区标识；或者，第一SSB的物理小区标识和第一SSB的射频参考频率；或者，第一SSB的物理小区标识和第一SSB的新无线绝对射频信道号码；或者，第一SSB的物理小区标识、第一SSB的新无线绝对射频信道号码和第一SSB所在的载波的工作频段；或者，第一SSB的新无线小区全球标识NCGI；或者，第一SSB的标识ID。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第一SSB的标识信息可能的形式有多种，也就是说可以通过多种信息标识SSB，为实现标识SSB提供灵活的标识方案。
结合第三十方面，在第三十方面的某些实现方式中，第一SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息包括以下信息中的至少一种：第一SSB所对应的小区的信道占用的物理资源块PRB的数量信息、以资源块为单位的传输带宽和子载波间隔或者第一SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽占总信道带宽的百分比。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第一SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息可能的形式有多种，也就是说可以通过多种信息指示第一SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽，为指示第一SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽提供灵活的指示方案。
结合第三十方面，在第三十方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：第一网络设备接收第二网络设备发送的第一响应消息，第一响应消息用于指示第二网络设备是否成功更新第一SSB的状态。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第一网络设备能够接收第二网络设备发送的第一 响应消息，根据第一响应消息明确获知第二网络设备是否成功更新第一SSB的状态。
结合第三十方面，在第三十方面的某些实现方式中，第一响应消息用于指示第二网络设备未成功更新第一SSB的状态时，第一响应消息中携带有第一时长，用于指示第一网络设备在第一时长后能够重新发送第一请求消息。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，若第一响应消息用于指示第二网络设备未成功更新第一SSB的状态，第一响应消息中能够携带第一时长，用于指示第一网络设备在第一时长后能够重新发送第一请求消息，为第一网络设备重新发起第一请求消息提供实现方案。
结合第三十方面，在第三十方面的某些实现方式中，第二网络设备中维护有第一网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息包括：第二网络设备中维护有第一网络设备中至少一个SSB的标识信息、第一网络设备中至少一个SSB的状态信息以及第一网络设备中至少一个SSB分别对应的至少一个小区的信道的带宽信息。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第一网络设备中维护邻居网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息包括多种信息，能够在SSB的某个信息发生变化时，及时确定SSB的状态变更。
第三十一方面，提供了一种通信方法，包括：第二网络设备接收第一网络设备发送的第二请求消息，第二请求消息用于请求将终端设备从第一网络设备切换至第二网络设备，其中，第二请求消息中携带第二指示信息，第二指示信息用于指示第一网络设备中的第一同步信号与物理广播信道块SSB即将被关闭，第二网络设备中维护有第一网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息；第二网络设备向第一网络设备发送第二响应消息，第二响应消息用于指示第二网络设备中为终端设备的资源准备情况。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第一网络设备可以请求将第一网络设备中的终端设备从第一网络设备切换至第二网络设备中，其中，第二请求消息中携带有终端设备从所述第一网络设备切换至所述第二网络设备的原因是所述第一SSB即将关闭的第二指示信息，能够为第二网络设备提供第一网络设备切换终端设备的原因，使得第二网络设备决定是否接收终端设备时多一个参考因素。
结合第三十一方面，在第三十一方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：第二网络设备接收第一网络设备发送的第一请求消息，第一请求消息中携带有指示所述第一SSB的第一指示信息；第一请求消息用于请求第二网络设备更新第一SSB的状态，其中，第二网络设备中维护有第一网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第一网络设备在确定关闭本地的第一SSB之后，向第二网络设备发送第一请求消息，请求第二网络设备更新第一SSB的状态。即第二网络设备能够获知第一SSB所对应的小区占用的资源的使用情况，若第一SSB所对应的小区占用的资源被释放的话，第二网络设备能够利用该部分资源，且第一请求消息中携带有指示第一SSB的第一指示信息，使得第二网络设备能够准确获知需要更新状态或需要激活的第一SSB具体为哪一个SSB，提高资源协调的准确性。
结合第三十一方面，在第三十一方面的某些实现方式中，第一请求消息中携带有指示第一SSB的第一指示信息，第一指示信息包括以下信息中的至少一种：第一SSB的标识信息、第一SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息以及SSB的状态列表，其中，SSB的状态 列表为第一SSB所属的网络设备中SSB状态信息的列表，并且SSB的状态列表中的第一SSB为休眠状态或激活状态，或者，SSB的状态列表为第一SSB的状态列表，或者，SSB的状态列表为第一SSB所属的网络设备中SSB中除第一SSB之外的剩余的SSB的状态列表。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，指示第一SSB的第一指示信息可以为多种可选的信息，提高方案的灵活性。
结合第三一十方面，在第三十一方面的某些实现方式中，第一SSB的标识信息包括：第一SSB的物理小区标识；或者，第一SSB的物理小区标识和第一SSB的射频参考频率；或者，第一SSB的物理小区标识和第一SSB的新无线绝对射频信道号码；或者，第一SSB的物理小区标识、第一SSB的新无线绝对射频信道号码和第一SSB所在的载波的工作频段；或者，第一SSB的新无线小区全球标识NCGI；或者，第一SSB的标识ID。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第一SSB的标识信息可能的形式有多种，也就是说可以通过多种信息标识SSB，为实现标识SSB提供灵活的标识方案。
结合第三十一方面，在第三十一方面的某些实现方式中，第一SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息包括以下信息中的至少一种：第一SSB所对应的小区的信道占用的物理资源块PRB的数量信息、以资源块为单位的传输带宽和子载波间隔或者第一SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽占总信道带宽的百分比。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第一SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息可能的形式有多种，也就是说可以通过多种信息指示第一SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽，为指示第一SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽提供灵活的指示方案。
结合第三十一方面，在第三十一方面的某些实现方式中，方法还包括：第二网络设备向第一网络设备发送第一响应消息，第一响应消息用于指示第二网络设备是否成功更新第一SSB的状态。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第一网络设备能够接收第二网络设备发送的第一响应消息，根据第一响应消息明确获知第二网络设备是否成功更新第一SSB的状态。
结合第三十一方面，在第三十一方面的某些实现方式中，第一响应消息用于指示第二网络设备未成功更新第一SSB的状态时，第一响应消息中携带有第一时长，用于指示第一网络设备在第一时长后能够重新发送第一请求消息。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，若第一响应消息用于指示第二网络设备未成功更新第一SSB的状态，第一响应消息中能够携带第一时长，用于指示第一网络设备在第一时长后能够重新发送第一请求消息，为第一网络设备重新发起第一请求消息提供实现方案。
结合第三十一方面，在第三十一方面的某些实现方式中，第二网络设备中维护有第一网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息包括：第二网络设备中维护有第一网络设备中至少一个SSB的标识信息、第一网络设备中至少一个SSB的状态信息以及第一网络设备中至少一个SSB分别对应的至少一个小区的信道的带宽信息。
根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第二网络设备中维护邻居网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息包括多种信息，能够在SSB的某个信息发生变化时，及时确定SSB的状态变更。
第三十二方面，提供了一种通信装置，该装置可以用来执行第三十方面及第三十方面的任意可能的实现方式中的第一网络设备的操作。具体地，通信装置包括用于执行上述第三十方面所描述的步骤或功能相对应的部件(means)可以是第一方面的第一网络设备。步骤或功能可以通过软件实现，或硬件实现，或者通过硬件和软件结合来实现。
第三十三方面，提供了一种通信装置，该装置可以用来用于执行第三十一方面及第三十一方面的任意可能的实现方式中的第二网络设备的操作。具体地，该通信装置可以包括用于执行上述第二方面所描述的步骤或功能相对应的部件(means)可以是第三十一方面的第二网络设备。步骤或功能可以通过软件实现，或硬件实现，或者通过硬件和软件结合来实现。
第三十四方面，提供了一种通信设备，包括，处理器，收发器，存储器，该存储器用于存储计算机程序，该收发器，用于执行第三十或第三十一方面中任一种可能实现方式中的通信方法中的收发步骤，该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序，使得该通信设备执行第三十或第三十一方面中任一种可能实现方式中的通信方法。
可选地，处理器为一个或多个，存储器为一个或多个。
可选地，存储器可以与处理器集成在一起，或者存储器与处理器分离设置。
可选的，收发器包括，发射机(发射器)和接收机(接收器)。
一个可能的设计中，提供了一种通信设备，包括收发器、处理器和存储器。该处理器用于控制收发器收发信号，该存储器用于存储计算机程序，该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序，使得该通信设备执行第三十方面或第三十方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
另一个可能的设计中，提供了一种通信设备，包括收发器、处理器和存储器。该处理器用于控制收发器收发信号，该存储器用于存储计算机程序，该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序，使得该通信设备执行第三十一方面或第三十一方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
第三十五方面，提供了一种系统，系统包括第三十二方面和第三十三方面提供的通信装置。
第三十六方面，提供了一种计算机程序产品，计算机程序产品包括：计算机程序(也可以称为代码，或指令)，当计算机程序被运行时，使得计算机执行上述第三十方面或第三十一方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
第三十七方面，提供了一种计算机可读介质，计算机可读介质存储有计算机程序(也可以称为代码，或指令)当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第三十方面或第三十一方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
第三十八方面，提供了一种芯片系统，包括存储器和处理器，该存储器用于存储计算机程序，该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序，使得安装有该芯片系统的通信设备执行上述第三十方面或第三十一方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
本申请实施例提供的通信方法，通过第一网络设备在确定确定关闭或激活第一同步信号与物理广播信道块SSB之后，向第二网络设备发送第一请求消息，请求第二网络设备更新第一SSB的状态或者激活第一SSB，使得第二网络设备能够明确获知SSB的资源占用情况，从而实现第一网络设备和第二网络设备之间的资源协调。
附图说明
图1是适用于本申请实施例的通信系统的示意性框图。
图2是本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的示意性流程图。
图3是本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的示意性流程图。
图4是本申请实施例提供的又一种通信方法的示意性流程图。
图5是本申请提出的通信装置10的示意图。
图6是适用于本申请实施例的第一网络设备40的结构示意图。
图7是本申请提出的通信装置20的示意图。
图8是适用于本申请实施例的第二网络设备50的结构示意图。
图9是本申请提出的通信装置30的示意图。
图10是适用于本申请实施例的第三网络设备60的结构示意图。
图11是本申请提出的通信装置70的示意图。
图12是适用于本申请实施例的第四网络设备80的结构示意图。
图13是本申请提出的通信装置90的示意图。
图14是适用于本申请实施例的第五网络设备100的结构示意图。
具体实施方式
下面将结合附图，对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统，例如：长期演进(long term evolution，LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex，FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(time division duplex，TDD)、通用移动通信系统(universal mobile telecommunication system，UMTS)、全球互联微波接入(worldwide interoperability for microwave access，WiMAX)通信系统、未来的第五代(5th generation，5G)系统或新无线(new radio，NR)等。
本申请实施例中的网络设备可以是用于与终端设备通信的设备，该网络设备可以是LTE系统中的演进型基站(evolved NodeB，eNB或eNodeB)，还可以是云无线接入网络(cloud radio access network，CRAN)场景下的无线控制器，或者该网络设备可以为中继站、接入点、车载设备、可穿戴设备以及未来5G网络中的网络设备或者未来演进的PLMN网络中的网络设备等，本申请实施例并不限定。
在本申请实施例中，网络设备包括硬件层、运行在硬件层之上的操作系统层，以及运行在操作系统层上的应用层。该硬件层包括中央处理器(central processing unit，CPU)、内存管理单元(memory management unit，MMU)和内存(也称为主存)等硬件。该操作系统可以是任意一种或多种通过进程(process)实现业务处理的计算机操作系统，例如，Linux操作系统、Unix操作系统、Android操作系统、iOS操作系统或windows操作系统等。该应用层包含浏览器、通讯录、文字处理软件、即时通信软件等应用。并且，本申请实施例并未对本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体的具体结构特别限定，只要能够通过运行记录有本申请实施例的提供的方法的代码的程序，以根据本申请实施例提供的方法进行通信即可，例如，本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体可以是终端设备或网络设备，或者，是终端设备或网络设备中能够调用程序并执行程序的功能模块。
另外，本申请的各个方面或特征可以实现成方法、装置或使用标准编程和/或工程技术的制品。本申请中使用的术语“制品”涵盖可从任何计算机可读器件、载体或介质访问的计算机程序。例如，计算机可读介质可以包括，但不限于:磁存储器件(例如，硬盘、软盘或磁带等)，光盘(例如，压缩盘(compact disc，CD)、数字通用盘(digital versatile disc，DVD)等)，智能卡和闪存器件(例如，可擦写可编程只读存储器(erasable programmable read-only memory，EPROM)、卡、棒或钥匙驱动器等)。另外，本文描述的各种存储介质可代表用于存储信息的一个或多个设备和/或其它机器可读介质。术语“机器可读介质”可包括但不限于，无线信道和能够存储、包含和/或承载指令和/或数据的各种其它介质。图1是适用于本申请实施例的通信系统的示意性框图。包括核心网设备、无线接入网设备以及无线接入网设备中的集中式单元和分布式单元。
本申请实施例中的图1中所示的核心网设备可以为不同通信系统中的核心网设备。例如，5G通信系统中的核心网设备或LTE通信系统中的核心网设备；无线接入网设备主要包括两个网络设备(如图1中所示的网络设备#1和网络设备#2)。
具体地，图1中的网络设备#1可以为基站(gNodeB，gNB)或者(ng-eNodeB，ng-eNB)；网络设备#2也可以为gNB或者ng-eNB。其中，gNB为终端设备提供NR的用户面和控制面协议和功能，ng-eNB为终端设备提供演进通用陆地无线接入(evolved universal terrestrial radio access，E-UTRA)的用户面和控制面协议和功能。gNB和gNB之间，gNB和ng-eNB之间，ng-eNB和gNB之间的接口都为Xn接口；无线接入网设备和核心网设备之间的接口称为NG接口。
具体地，gNB或ng-eNB可以由集中单元(central unit，CU)和分布式单元(distributed unit，DU)构成。具体地，一个无线接入网设备中可以包括一个集中单元和多个分布式单元(如图1中所示的分布式单元#1和分布式单元#2)。
进一步地，CU设备处理无线高层协议栈功能。例如，无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)层，分组数据汇聚协议(packet data convergence protocol，PDCP)层等，甚至也能够支持部分核心网功能下沉至接入网，称作边缘计算网络，能够满足未来通信网络对于新兴业务(例如，视频，网购，虚拟/增强现实)对于网络时延的更高要求，也正是由于通信网元，结构的变化，导致协议栈都会进行相应的调整变化，因此对于下一代网络的命名，5G NR也形象的说明了将来5G网络自身多方面颠覆性的变化。CU涵盖无线接入网高层协议栈以及核心网的一部分功能，涉及的主要协议层包括RRC功能、服务发现应用协议(service discovery application protocol，SDAP)、分组数据汇聚协议(packet data convergence protocol，PDCP)子层功能，而DU涵盖了基带处理的物理层以及层2部分功能，具体地，DU实现射频处理功能和无线链路控制(radio link control，RLC)、媒质接入控制(medium access control，MAC)以及物理层(physical layer，PHY)等基带处理功能。CU可以集中式的部署，DU的部署取决实际网络环境，核心城区，话务密度较高，站间距较小，机房资源受限的区域，例如高校，大型演出场馆等，DU也可以集中式部署，而话务较稀疏，站间距较大等区域，例如郊县，山区等区域，DU可以采取分布式的部署方式。
应理解，图1只是一种示意性的场景图。本申请实施例提供的通信方法除了可以应用在图1所示的网络设备#1和网络设备#2之间的资源协调以及图1所示的网络设备#2中的 多个分布式单元之间的资源协调之外，还可以应用在其他的网络设备之间进行资源协调，这里不再一一举例说明。
为了便于理解本申请提供的通信方法，下面简单介绍本申请实施例中涉及的几个基本的概念。
1、SSB。
本申请中涉及的SSB由PSS、SSS和PBCH构成，SSB在时域上占用4个符号、在频域上占用240个子载波。其中，终端设备可以通过PSS获取物理层小区标识(identify，ID)和时隙同步，终端设备可以通过SSS获取循环前缀(cyclic prefix，CP)长度、物理小区组ID、帧同步，终端设备通过解码PBCH能够获得主信息块(master information block，MIB)，包括公共天线端口数目、系统帧号(system frame number，SFN)、下行系统带宽、物理混合自动重传指示信息(physical hybrid automatic repeat request indicator channel，PHICH)配置信息。
具体地，当一个SSB与剩余最小系统信息(remaining minimum system information，RMSI)相关联时，该SSB对应一个单独的小区，并且该小区具有唯一的NR小区全球标识(NR cell global identifier，NCGI)。此时，这种SSB称为小区定义SSB(cell defining SSB，CD-SSB)。只有CD-SSB才可以发送主信息块(master information block，MIB)消息和系统信息块1(system information block，SIB1)消息，并且UE进行小区选择时只基于CD-SSB的同步信号接入。其他的SSB只能发送MIB消息，不能发送SIB1消息。
应理解，本申请中并不限制SSB为何种类型的SSB，包括上述的CD-SSB和非CD-SSB的SSB。由上述可知SSB在终端设备进行小区搜索过程中具有重大意义，那么针对一个通信系统来说SSB所对应的小区占用的资源是非常可贵的，如果能够实现不同的网络设备之间SSB所对应的小区占用的资源协调，从而降低不同SSB所对应的小区之间占用的资源的冲突，提高整个通信系统的性能。因此，如何实现针对SSB所对应的小区占用的资源进行协调成为亟待解决的问题，下面介绍本申请具体实施例时将详细介绍。
还应理解，SSB的基本概念在现有的协议中已经详细定义，本申请只是简单进行了描述，上述针对SSB的描述并不能限制本申请的保护范围，只是为了增加对本申请实施例的理解。
2、SSB信息。
本申请提出SSB信息(SSB information)的概念。具体地，SSB信息用于一个网络设备向另一个网络设备指示某个本地的SSB状态发生变化；或者，用于一个网络设备向另一个网络设备指示该另一个网络设备的某个或某些SSB需要激活。其中，SSB信息的提出是本申请的一个重要的贡献，下面以举例的形式详细介绍该SSB信息的具体表现形式：
1)SSB的ID。
具体地，SSB信息可以是显示地指示某个或某些SSB。显示地指示方式包括直接指示SSB的ID。例如，网络设备#1中包括10个SSB(SSB#1～SSB#10)，这10个SSB在网络设备#1中的相对标识分别为ID#1～ID#10。若网络设备#1需要向网络设备#2指示10个SSB中的SSB#1从激活状态更新为休眠状态，则网络设备#1向网络设备#2发送的SSB信息可以是ID#1。
2)SSB所对应的小区的PCI。
具体地，SSB信息可以是间接地指示某个或某些SSB。间接地指示方式包括隐示地指示某个或某些SSB的PCI。可以理解为，由于每个SSB都对应一个PCI，指示一个SSB的PCI，可以间接确定该SSB。例如，网络设备#1中包括10个SSB(SSB#1～SSB#10)，这10个SSB所对应的小区的PCI分别为PCI#1～PCI#10。若网络设备#1需要向网络设备#2指示10个SSB中的SSB#1从激活状态更新为休眠状态，则网络设备#1向网络设备#2发送的SSB信息可以是PCI#1。
应理解，每个SSB都对应一个PCI，并且多个SSB所对应的小区的PCI可以相同，也可以不同。在SSB信息只包含SSB的PCI时，本申请主要针对的是每个SSB所对应的小区的PCI不相同的情况。
3)SSB的射频参考频率。
具体地，SSB信息可以是间接地指示某个或某些SSB。间接地指示方式包括隐示地指示某个或某些SSB的射频参考频率(reference frequencies，RF)。可以理解为，由于每个SSB都对应一个射频参考频率，SSB的射频参考频率用于标识SSB的位置，也就是SSB的频点。具体地，射频参考频率可以由NR绝对射频信道号码指示。
指示一个SSB的射频参考频率，可以间接确定该SSB。例如，网络设备#1中包括10个SSB(SSB#1～SSB#10)，这10个SSB对应的RF分别为RF#1～RF#10。若网络设备#1需要向网络设备#2指示10个SSB中的SSB#1从激活状态更新为休眠状态，则网络设备#1向网络设备#2发送的SSB信息可以是RF#1。
4)SSB的NR绝对射频信道号码(NR absolute radio frequency channel number，NR-ARFCN)。
其中，由3)中所述的射频参考频率可以由NR绝对射频信道号码指示，也就是说SSB的信息为SSB的射频参考频率时，还可以理解为SSB的NR绝对射频信道号码。具体地，SSB的NR绝对射频信道号码指示SSB时，与上述3)中所述的SSB的射频参考频率指示SSB类似，这里不再赘述。
5)SSB所在的载波的工作频段。
具体地，SSB信息可以是间接地指示某个或某些SSB。间接地指示方式包括隐示地指示某个或某些SSB所在的载波的工作频段。可以理解为，由于每个SSB都有对应的载波的工作频段，指示一个SSB所在的载波的工作频段，可以间接确定该SSB。例如，网络设备#1中包括10个SSB(SSB#1～SSB#10)，这10个SSB所在的载波的工作频段分别为工作频段#1～工作频段#10。若网络设备#1需要向网络设备#2指示10个SSB中的SSB#1从激活状态更新为休眠状态，则网络设备#1向网络设备#2发送的SSB信息可以是工作频段#1。
应理解，在一个载波的频率范围内，可以传输多个SSB。在SSB信息只包含SSB所在的载波的工作频段时，本申请主要针对的是每个SSB对应的工作频段不相同的情况。
6)SSB的NCGI。
在上述介绍SSB时，提出CD-SSB的概念。已知CD-SSB对应一个单独的小区，并且该小区具有唯一的NCGI。
那么对于CD-SSB来说，SSB信息可以是间接地指示某个或某些CD-SSB。间接地指示方式包括隐示地指示某个或某些CD-SSB的NCGI。可以理解为，由于每个CD-SSB都 有对应的NCGI，指示一个SSB的NCGI，可以间接确定该SSB。例如，网络设备#1中包括10个SSB(SSB#1～SSB#10)，这10个SSB的NCGI分别为NCGI#1～NCGI#10。若网络设备#1需要向网络设备#2指示10个SSB中的SSB#1从激活状态更新为休眠状态，则网络设备#1向网络设备#2发送的SSB信息可以是NCGI#1。
7)SSB所对应的小区的信道占用的物理资源块(physical resource block，PRB)数量。
具体地，SSB信息可以是间接地指示某个或某些SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息。其中SSB所对应的小区的信道占用的PRB数量可以用于标识SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽。所以SSB信息可以是SSB所对应的小区的信道占用的PRB数量。例如，网络设备#1中包括10个SSB(SSB#1～SSB#10)，这10个SSB所分别对应的10个小区的信道占用的PRB数量分别为PRB#1～PRB#10。若网络设备#1需要向网络设备#2指示10个SSB中的SSB#1从激活状态更新为休眠状态，则网络设备#1向网络设备#2发送的SSB信息可以是PRB#1。
8)以资源块为单位的传输带宽和子载波间隔。
具体地，SSB信息可以是间接地指示某个或某些SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息。其中SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽可以用以资源块为单位的传输带宽和子载波间隔表示。所以SSB信息可以是以资源块为单位的传输带宽和子载波间隔。例如，网络设备#1中包括10个SSB(SSB#1～SSB#10)，这10个SSB所分别对应的10个小区的信道带宽分别用以资源块为单位的传输带宽和子载波间隔1～10表示。若网络设备#1需要向网络设备#2指示10个SSB中的SSB#1从激活状态更新为休眠状态，则网络设备#1向网络设备#2发送的SSB信息可以是1。
9)SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽占总信道带宽的百分比。
具体地，SSB信息可以是间接地指示某个或某些SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息。其中SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽可以用占总信道带宽的百分比表示。所以SSB信息可以是SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽占总信道带宽的百分比。例如，网络设备#1中包括10个SSB(SSB#1～SSB#10)，这10个SSB所分别对应的10个小区的信道带宽分别占总信道带宽的百分比为1％～10％表示。若网络设备#1需要向网络设备#2指示10个SSB中的SSB#1从激活状态更新为休眠状态，则网络设备#1向网络设备#2发送的SSB信息可以是1％。其中，总信道带宽为预设值。
10)SSB所属的网络设备中至少一个SSB状态信息的列表，并且所述SSB的状态列表中的该SSB为休眠状态或激活状态。
具体地，SSB信息可以是直接地指示某个或某些SSB在SSB状态信息的列表中状态。例如，SSB#1属于网络设备#1，且网络设备#1中一共包括10个SSB(SSB#1～SSB#10)，这10个SSB的状态信息可以是激活(active)状态或休眠(inactive，或者dormant)状态。若网络设备#1需要向网络设备#2指示10个SSB中的SSB#1从激活状态更新为休眠状态，则网络设备#1向网络设备#2发送的SSB信息可以是网络设备#1中的SSB状态信息的列表，并且在该列表中标出SSB#1的状态为休眠状态。
假设，网络设备#1更新SSB#1的状态之前，所述网络设备#1中的SSB状态信息的列表为下面表1所示的情况。
表1SSB状态表
SSB 状态
SSB#1 active
SSB#2 active
SSB#3 active
SSB#4 active
SSB#5 active
SSB#6 active
SSB#7 active
SSB#8 active
SSB#9 active
SSB#10 active
那么在网络设备#1向网络设备#2指示10个SSB中的SSB#1从激活状态更新为休眠状态之前，网络设备#2中维护的网络设备#1中的至少一个SSB的状态信息如表1所示。
进而网络设备#1向网络设备#2发送的SSB信息可以是网络设备#1中的SSB状态信息的列表，并且在该列表中标出SSB#1的状态为休眠状态为下面表2所示的情况。
表2SSB状态表
SSB 状态
SSB#1 inactive，或者dormant
SSB#2 actite
SSB#3 active
SSB#4 active
SSB#5 active
SSB#6 active
SSB#7 active
SSB#8 active
SSB#9 active
SSB#10 active
网络设备#2可以基于接收到的表2确定网络设备#1中的SSB#1从激活状态更新为休眠状态。
11)SSB的状态列表。
具体地，SSB信息可以是直接地指示某个或某些SSB的状态。例如，SSB#1属于网络设备#1，且网络设备#1中一共包括10个SSB(SSB#1～SSB#10)，这10个SSB的状态信息可以是激活状态或休眠状态。若网络设备#1需要向网络设备#2指示10个SSB中的SSB#1从激活状态更新为休眠状态，则网络设备#1向网络设备#2发送的SSB信息可以是网络设备#1中SSB#1的状态。
假设，网络设备#1更新SSB#1的状态之前，所述网络设备#1中的SSB状态信息的列表为上面表1所示的情况。那么在网络设备#1向网络设备#2指示10个SSB中的SSB#1 从激活状态更新为休眠状态之前，网络设备#2中维护的网络设备#1中的至少一个SSB的状态信息如表1所示。
进而网络设备#1向网络设备#2发送的SSB信息可以是网络设备#1中SSB#1的状态为下面表3所示的情况。
表3SSB#1的状态
SSB 状态
SSB#1 inactive，或者dormant
网络设备#2可以基于接收到的表3确定网络设备#1中的SSB#1从激活状态更新为休眠状态。
12)其余SSB的状态列表。
具体地，SSB信息可以是间接地指示某个或某些SSB的状态。例如，SSB#1属于网络设备#1，且网络设备#1中一共包括10个SSB(SSB#1～SSB#10)，这10个SSB的状态信息可以是激活状态或休眠状态。若网络设备#1需要向网络设备#2指示10个SSB中的SSB#1从激活状态更新为休眠状态，则网络设备#1向网络设备#2发送的SSB信息可以是网络设备#1中除该SSB#1之外的SSB#2～SSB#9的状态。
假设，网络设备#1更新SSB#1的状态之前，所述网络设备#1中的SSB状态信息的列表为上面表1所示的情况。那么在网络设备#1向网络设备#2指示10个SSB中的SSB#1从激活状态更新为休眠状态之前，网络设备#2中维护的网络设备#1中的至少一个SSB的状态信息如表1所示。
进而网络设备#1向网络设备#2发送的SSB信息可以是网络设备#1中除该SSB#1之外的SSB#2～SSB#9的状态为下面表4所示的情况。
表4SSB#2～SSB#9的状态表
SSB 状态
SSB#2 active
SSB#3 active
SSB#4 active
SSB#5 active
SSB#6 active
SSB#7 active
SSB#8 active
SSB#9 active
SSB#10 active
网络设备#2可以基于接收到的表4以及维护的表1确定网络设备#1中的SSB#1从激活状态更新为休眠状态。
从上述对于每个SSB信息可能的形式的描述可以看出，其中1)～6)从定义上来看主要是为了标识SSB的，所以1)～6)所示的6种SSB信息可以统称为SSB的标识信息。应理解，还有其他能够标识SSB的标识信息，上述的1)～6)6种SSB的标识信息只是举例的形式，不能限制本申请的保护范围，其他能够标识SSB的标识信息也在本申请的保护范围之内；其中7)～9)从定义上来看主要是为了指示SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽的， 所以7)～9)所示的3种SSB信息可以统称为SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息。应理解，还有其他能够指示SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽的信息，上述的7)～9)3种指示SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽的信息只是举例的形式，不能限制本申请的保护范围，其他能够指示SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽的信息也在本申请的保护范围之内；其中10)～12)从定义上来看主要是为了指示SSB的状态的，所以10)～12)所示的3种SSB信息可以统称为SSB的状态列表。应理解，还有其他能够用于指示SSB的状态的信息，上述的10)～12)3种用于指示SSB的状态的信息只是举例的形式，不能限制本申请的保护范围，其他能够用于指示SSB的状态的信息也在本申请的保护范围之内。
还应理解，上述举例的每个SSB信息可能的形式中，所提供的具体例子不能限制本申请的保护范围。例如，上述举例中涉及的网络设备#1中的SSB的个数可以不是10个、网络设备#1中状态发生变化的SSB的个数可以不是1个，也可以是不是SSB#1、SSB还可以是用于指示网络设备#2中需要激活的SSB。其中，网络设备#1向网络设备#2指示网络设备#2中的SSB中需要激活的SSB时，具体地SSB信息如上1)～12)所述，这里不再赘述。
还应理解，SSB信息可以是上述的1)～12)所述的任意一个信息，或者，SSB信息可以是上述的1)～12)中所述的信息中，任意两个以上的信息的组合，由于SSB可能的形式很多，这里不一一列举。
3、关闭SSB。
具体地，本申请中所涉及的关闭SSB(deactivate SSB，或者switch off SSB)指的是某个SSB从激活状态转变为休眠状态。其中，SSB为激活状态只是表示该SSB所对应的小区能够用于接收和/或发送数据，将能够用于接收和/或发送数据的小区所对应的SSB称为激活状态只是一种举例，还可以称之为工作状态、非休眠状态等；同理，SSB为休眠状态只是表示该SSB所对应的小区当前时刻无法用于接收和/或发送数据，将当前时刻无法用于接收和/或发送数据的小区所对应的SSB称为休眠状态只是一种举例，还可以称之为非激活状态等，也就是说本申请的重点不在于怎么称呼不同的SSB的状态，可以是现有技术中的任意一种称呼，也可以是未来技术中的可能的称呼，本申请对此并不限制。
4、激活SSB。
具体地，本申请中所涉及的激活SSB(activate SSB，或者switch on SSB)指的是某个SSB从休眠状态转变为激活状态。
5、SSB负载信息。
本申请中所涉及的SSB负载信息，可以指的是SSB所对应的小区的无线资源利用率信息，例如：上行/下行保证比特速率类承载物理资源块(uplink/downlink guaranteed bit rate physical resource block，UL/DL GBR PRB)利用率、上行/下行非保证比特速率类承载物理资源块(uplink/downlink non-guaranteed bit rate physical resource block，UL/DL non-GBRPRB)利用率、UL/DL总的PRB利用率等；SSB负载信息还可以是SSB所对应的小区的硬件负载指标，例如：UL/DL硬件负载指标(低，中，高，过载等)；SSB负载信息还可以是SSB所对应的小区的软件负载指标，例如：UL/DL软件负载指标(低，中，高，过载等)；SSB负载信息还可以是SSB所对应的小区的容量值，例如：UL/DL可用容量占总容量的百分比；SSB负载信息还可以是SSB所对应的小区的过载状态指示信息，SSB 所对应的小区的过载状态指示信息用于指示SSB所对应的小区处于过载状态或者非过载状态。下面，为便于理解以SSB负载信息指SSB所对应的小区的无线资源利用率信息为例，简单说明本申请中涉及的SSB所对应的小区的负载以及SSB所对应的小区的负载状态。
SSB所对应的小区传输的数据使用的无线资源占用该SSB所对应的小区所拥有的全部无线资源的比率称为SSB所对应的小区的负载，该比率与预设比率门限(该预设比率门限可以是低负载门限，或者高负载门限)的相比，大于或等于预设的高负载门限时称SSB所对应的小区的负载高、小于或等于预设的低负载门限时称SSB所对应的小区的负载低。需要传输的数据占用的无线资源超过SSB所对应的小区的全部无线资源时，称SSB所对应的小区的负载处于过载状态。
例如，一个SSB所对应的小区的PRB数量为100个，上述的预设的低负载门限为20％。SSB所对应的小区的资源上需要用于传输第一数据，且传输该第一数据需要占用2个PRB，此时SSB所对应的小区的资源上传输的数据使用的无线资源占用该SSB所对应的小区的全部无线资源的比率为2％，则在此情况下SSB所对应的小区的负载低，可以关闭该SSB；或者，
又例如，一个SSB所对应的小区的PRB数量为100个，上述的预设的高负载门限为70％。SSB所对应的小区的资源上需要传输第一数据，且传输该第一数据需要占用80个PRB，此时SSB所对应的小区的资源上传输的数据使用的无线资源占用该SSB所对应的小区的全部无线资源的比率为80％，则在此情况下SSB所对应的小区的负载很高，如果有还其他数据需要传输，为了保证传输性能，可能需要激活某个SSB所对应的小区执行传输待传输的数据；或者，
SSB所对应的小区的资源上需要传输第一数据，且传输该第一数据需要占用101个PRB，此时SSB所对应的小区无法执行传输该第一数据的功能，则在此情况下SSB所对应的小区的负载处于过载状态。
上述的SSB所对应的小区可以理解为：每个小区都需要发送SSB，其中，SSB是用于终端设备进行同步的。小区的资源是通过SSB告知终端设备的，SSB所占的资源为所对应的的小区的资源的一部分。
上文介绍了本申请实施例能够应用的场景以及本申请实施例涉及的一些概念。由上文介绍可知，在现有的5G通信系统中，SSB主要应用于终端设备小区搜索过程中，例如上文所述的终端设备利用PSS和SSS完成下行同步过程以及终端设备解码PBCH，获得MIB等。也就是说，现有的通信协议中仅仅给出了SSB的定义和用途，而并未涉及如何对SSB所对应的小区占用系统资源的进行协调。应理解，在通信系统中每个信息均会占用一定的系统资源，对于SSB来说也不例外，在通信系统中不同的SSB所对应的小区占用着不同的资源。其中，SSB所对应的小区占用的资源可以是SSB所对应的小区占用的时域资源、SSB所对应的小区的PCI等，那么在通信系统中不同的网络设备中的SSB所对应的小区占用着不同的系统资源，如果某个网络设备中的SSB所对应的小区占用的资源可以被释放，且通信系统中的其他网络设备能够得知该SSB所对应的小区占用的资源被释放了，自身可以使用该被释放资源，从而能够实现通信系统中不同的网络设备之间进行SSB所对应的小区占用的资源协调。本申请提出一种通信方法和通信装置，通过使通信系统中的 网络设备在确定关闭或激活自身或通信系统中的其他网络设备的SSB之后，向通信系统中的其他网络设备发送请求消息，请求通信系统中的其他网络设备更新该SSB的状态或者激活该SSB，即通信系统中的不同网络设备之间能够获知该SSB所对应的小区占用的资源的情况，从而在获知该SSB所对应的小区占用的资源被释放时，确定能够使用该部分资源，或者，在获知某部分的资源被该SSB所对应的小区占用时，避免使用该部分资源。
为了简便描述，下文中可以将该SSB所对应的小区的负载简称为SSB的负载、SSB所对应的小区的负载状态简称为SSB的负载状态、SSB所对应的小区占用的资源简称为SSB占用的资源、SSB所对应的小区的PCI简称SSB对应的PCI。
下面将详细介绍本申请实施例提供的通信方法。
具体地，本申请是实施例提供的通信方法可以应用于多个不同的网络设备之间进行资源协调。下面以两个网络设备之间进行资源协调为例，介绍本申请实施例提供的通信方法。其中，该两个网络设备互为邻居网络设备，即第二网络设备中维护有所述第一网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息，第一网络设备中维护有所述第二网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息。
示例性地，第一网络设备中维护有第二网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息包括：
第一网络设备中维护有第二网络设备中至少一个SSB的标识信息；
第一网络设备中维护有第二网络设备中至少一个SSB的状态信息；
第一网络设备中维护有第二网络设备中至少一个SSB分别对应的至少一个小区的信道的带宽信息。
示例性地，第二网络设备中维护有第一网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息包括：
第二网络设备中维护有第一网络设备中至少一个SSB的标识信息；
第二网络设备中维护有第一网络设备中至少一个SSB的状态信息；
第二网络设备中维护有第一网络设备中至少一个SSB分别对应的至少一个小区的信道的带宽信息。
图2是本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的示意性流程图。包括第一网络设备、第二网络设备以及步骤S110和S120，下面结合附图2详细介绍步骤S110和S120。
S110，第一网络设备确定关闭或激活第一SSB。
情况一：
第一网络设备确定关闭(deactivate，或者switch-off)或激活(activate，或者switch on)第一网络设备中的第一SSB。例如，第一网络设备中一共有10个SSB(SSB#1～SSB#10)，其中，若SSB#1为激活状态，第一网络设备确定关闭10个SSB中的SSB#1指的是SSB#1从激活状态转变为休眠状态；若SSB#1为休眠状态，第一网络设备确定激活10个SSB中的SSB#1指的是SSB#1从休眠状态转变为激活状态。
进一步地，若第一网络设备确定关闭第一网络设备中的第一SSB时，对于第一网络设备来说关闭第一SSB之后，可以降低发送SSB的功耗，达到减少第一网络设备能耗的目的。例如，在楼宇部署场景中，不同的SSB指向不同的区域：高层、中层、低层，关闭第一SSB可以关闭第一SSB对应的射频通道，进而达到减少第一网络设备能耗的目的。对于终端设备来说可以降低检测SSB的射频带宽和搜索复杂度，达到减少终端设备能耗的目的。也就是说本申请实施例提供的通信方法，在第一网络设备关闭本地的SSB时， 能够减少第一网络设备能耗以及降低终端设备检测SSB的射频带宽和搜索复杂度。
应理解，本申请实施例中只是以第一网络设备确定关闭或激活第一网络设备中的某一个SSB为例进行说明。本申请实施例提供的通信方法在实际的应用过程中，对于第一网络设备来说可以确定关闭或激活第一网络设备中的一个或多个SSB，只是确定关闭或激活第一网络设备中的多个SSB的方法流程，与确定关闭或激活第一网络设备中的一个SSB的方法流程类似，为了便于描述本文中均以确定关闭或激活第一网络设备中的一个SSB进行说明。对于确定关闭或激活第一网络设备中的多个SSB的情况，本申请中则不再赘述。
示例性地，上述第一SSB为第一网络设备中的一个SSB时，第一网络设备确定关闭或激活所述第一SSB包括：
第一网络设备基于第一网络设备中的负载信息决定关闭或激活所述第一SSB。
例如，第一网络设备中的负载信息指示第一SSB所对应的小区的DL GBR PRB利用率低于某个阈值时，可以关闭，将第一SSB所对应的小区占用的资源释放出来，供其他网络设备中与第一SSB所对应的小区占用的资源相同的SSB所对应的小区使用；还例如，第一网络设备中的负载信息指示有负载需要第一SSB进行发送和/或接收时，则第一网络设备确定需要激活第一SSB，使得第一SSB能够发送和/或接收数据。
示例性地，上述第一SSB为第一网络设备中的一个SSB时，第一网络设备确定关闭或激活所述第一SSB包括：
第一网络设备接收到关闭或激活SSB指示信息，该关闭或激活SSB指示信息用于指示第一网络设备关闭或激活所述第一SSB。
例如，第一网络设备接收到关闭第一SSB指示信息，根据接收到的指示信息关闭第一SSB，将第一SSB所对应的小区占用的资源释放出来，供其他网络设备中与第一SSB所对应的小区占用的资源相同的SSB所对应的小区使用；还例如，第一网络设备接收到激活第一SSB指示信息，根据接收到的指示信息激活第一SSB，使得第一SSB能够发送和/或接收数据。其中，第一网络设备可以是从操作、管理、维护(operation administration and maintenance，OAM)设备接收关闭或激活SSB的指示信息，或者，第一网络设备可以是从核心网设备接收关闭或激活SSB的指示信息，或者，第一网络设备可以是从其他网络设备接收关闭或激活SSB的指示信息。
应理解，上述的第一网络设备基于第一网络设备中的负载信息，或接收到的关闭或激活SSB指示信息决定关闭或激活第一SSB，只是举例说明第一网络设备可以在什么情况下确定关闭或激活第一SSB，并不对本申请构成任何限定，其他第一网络设备能够确定关闭或激活SSB的情况也在本申请的保护范围之内。
情况二：
第一网络设备确定激活第二网络设备中的SSB的第一SSB。例如，第二网络设备中一共有10个SSB(SSB#1～SSB#10)，其中，若第二网络设备中的SSB#1为休眠状态，第一网络设备确定激活第二网络设备中10个SSB中的SSB#1指的是第一网络设备请求第二网络设备将SSB#1从休眠状态转变为激活状态。
应理解，本申请实施例中只是以第一网络设备确定激活第二网络设备中的某一个SSB为例进行说明。本申请实施例提供的通信方法在实际应用过程中，第一网络设备可以确定 激活第二网络设备中的一个或多个SSB，只是确定激活第二网络设备中的多个SSB的方法流程，与确定激活第二网络设备中的一个SSB的方法流程类似，为了便于描述本文中均已确定激活第二网络设备中的一个SSB进行说明。对于第一网络设备确定激活第二网络设备中的多个SSB的情况，本申请中则不再赘述。
示例性地，第一SSB为第二网络设备中SSB中的一个SSB时，第一网络设备确定激活第一SSB包括：
第一网络设备根据第一网络设备中的负载信息确定需要激活第二网络设备中的第一SSB。
例如，第一网络设备中的负载信息指示该SSB处于过载状态，第一网络设备根据第一网络设备中维护的第二网络设备中的SSB信息，得知第二网络设备中的第一SSB能够帮助本地的SSB分担该负载，进而第一网络设备请求第二网络设备激活第一SSB，用于负载均衡。
示例性地，第一SSB为第二网络设备中SSB中的一个SSB时，第一网络设备确定激活第一SSB包括：
第一网络设备根据第一网络设备的覆盖信息确定需要激活第二网络设备中的第一SSB。其中，第一网络设备可以基于终端设备上报的测量信息，获知第一网络设备的覆盖情况，第一网络设备的覆盖情况可以是第一网络设备的覆盖是否存在漏洞，还可以是第一网络设备的覆盖质量。且第一网络设备根据历史测量信息能够获知第二网络设备中的SSB能够提供的覆盖。
例如，第一网络设备中的覆盖信息指示第一网络设备中某个SSB提供的覆盖质量较差，并且第一网络设备中维护有第二网络设备中的SSB的信息，根据历史测量信息能够获知第二网络设备中的SSB的能够提供的覆盖。第一网络设备确定第一网络设备中某个SSB提供的覆盖范围与第二网络设备中第一SSB能够提供的覆盖范围类似，则第一网络设备请求第二网络设备激活第一SSB，用于提高覆盖质量。其中，历史测量信息中可以包括第二网络设备中的SSB的覆盖范围。
示例性地，第一SSB为第二网络设备中的一个SSB时，第一网络设备确定激活第一SSB包括：
第一网络设备接收到激活SSB指示信息，激活SSB指示信息用于指示激活第二网络设备中的第一SSB。
例如，第一网络设备接收到激活第二网络设备中的第一SSB指示信息，根据接收到的指示信息激活第二网络设备中的第一SSB。其中，第一网络设备可以是从OAM设备接收激活SSB的指示信息，或者，第一网络设备可以是从核心网设备接收关闭或激活SSB的指示信息，或者，第一网络设备可以是从其他网络设备接收关闭或激活SSB的指示信息。
应理解，上述的第一网络设备基于第一网络设备中的负载信息、第一网络设备的覆盖信息或接收到激活SSB指示信息确定激活第二网络设备中的第一SSB，只是举例说明第一网络设备可以在什么情况下确定激活第二网络设备中的第一SSB，并不对本申请构成任何限定，其他第一网络设备能够确定激活第二网络设备中的第一SSB的情况也在本申请的保护范围之内。
具体地，第一网络设备确定关闭或激活第一SSB之后，执行S120，第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送第一请求消息。
示例性地，图2中所示的方法应用在两个基站之间，其中，基站可以为图1中所示的无线接入网设备。若上述的第一网络设备和第二网络设备分别为图1中所述的网络设备#1和网络设备#2，第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送第一请求消息可以包括如下两种方式：
方式一：该第一请求消息可以通过第一网络设备和第二网络设备之间的接口直接转发。例如，图1所示的网络设备#1与网络设备#2之间的Xn接口。
方式二：该第一请求消息可以通过核心网络设备转发，即第一网络设备首先将第一请求消息发送至核心网络设备，再由核心网络设备将配第一请求消息发送给第二网络设备。例如，图1所示的网络设备#1通过与核心网络设备之间的NG接口，首先将第一请求消息发送至核心网络设备。核心网络设备再将第一请求消息发送给网络设备#2。
应理解，上述的对于第一网络设备如何将第一请求消息发送给第二网络设备只是举例的形式，并不对本申请构成任何限定。其他能够将第一请求消息发送给第二网络设备的方式也在本申请的保护范围之内。
具体地，第一请求消息中携带有指示第一SSB的第一指示信息，第一指示信息可以称为SSB信息(SSB information)。其中，对于第二网络设备来说，接收到第一请求消息可以执行不同的步骤，包括以下两种情况：
情况一：
对应S110中的情况一，第一SSB为第一网络设备中的一个SSB时，第一请求消息用于请求第二网络设备更新第一SSB的状态。
应理解，由S110中的情况一中所述的可知，第一网络设备可以确定关闭或激活第一网络设备中的一个或多个SSB，在第一网络设备确定关闭或激活第一网络设备中的多个SSB的情况下，第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送第一请求消息中可以携带分别指示该多个SSB的多个指示信息，或者，第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送多个第一请求消息，该多个第一请求消息分别携带指示该多个SSB的多个指示信息。本申请实施例中并不限制第一网络设备确定关闭或激活第一网络设备中的多个SSB的情况下，第一网络设备如何请求第二网络设备获知该情况，本申请中仅仅限定在第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送的请求消息中，携带有指示某个或某些被激活或关闭的SSB的指示信息。为了便于描述本文中均以第一请求消息中携带指示第一SSB的第一指示信息进行说明。对于第一网络设备确定关闭或激活第一网络设备中的多个SSB的情况，第一网络设备如何请求第二网络设备获知该情况本申请中则不再赘述。
示例性地，在本申请实施例中第一请求消息可以是复用现有的第一网络设备与第二网络设备之间的交互信令，只是在现有的信令中新增信息元素(information element，IE)。具体地，新增的IE用于指示第一SSB的第一指示信息，第一指示信息可以称为SSB信息。下面将详细介绍第一指示信息可能的形式，这里不赘述。
例如，在此情况下第一请求消息可以为现有的第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送的配置更新(configuration update)消息，在该配置更新消息中新增SSB信息。具体地，新增SSB信息可以是占用多个字节的一个信息元素，该多个字节可以是为了传输SSB信息而新增的传输资源，或者，该多个字节中部分或全部字节为配置更新消息中的预留字节。其 中，现有的配置更新消息用于更新应用层配置数据。
示例性地，在本申请实施例中第一请求消息可以是新增的第一网络设备与第二网络设备之间的交互信令，具体地，第一请求消息包括用于指示第一SSB的第一指示信息。例如，新增第一网络设备与第二网络设备之间的SSB更新请求(SSB update request)消息。
应理解，本申请对于第一请求消息的具体形式并不限制，可以是复用现有的信令，也可以是新增的信令。本申请中仅仅限制第一请求消息中携带了上述的指示第一SSB的第一指示信息。
具体地，第一网络设备关闭第一网络设备中的第一SSB，则第一请求消息用于请求第二网络设备将第二网络设备维护的第一网络设备中至少一个的SSB信息中，第一SSB的状态从激活状态更新为休眠状态；还例如，第一网络设备激活第一网络设备中的第一SSB，则第一请求消息用于请求第二网络设备将第二网络设备维护的第一网络设备中至少一个的SSB信息中，第一SSB的状态从休眠状态更新为激活状态。
进一步地，当第一网络设备确定关闭第一网络设备的第一SSB后，对于第二网络设备来说，第二网络设备可以在本地启用与第一SSB所对应的小区占用相同资源的SSB。例如，第二网络设备中启用的SSB可以与第一SSB配置相同的频点、PCI等。进而可以降低邻居网络设备之间的SSB配置冲突的风险；还例如，第二网络设备知道第一网络设备中第一SSB所对应的小区的信道占用的PRB数量、以资源块为单位的传输带宽和子载波间隔、第一SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽占总信道带宽百分比等，则第二网络设备根据这些信息进行可用资源(例如，PRB)的协调利用，达到资源协调的目的，从而降低第二网络设备和第一网络设备之间的干扰，进而提高信噪比和吞吐量。
示例性地，图2所示的方法流程还包括S121，第二网络设备更新第一SSB的状态。
具体地，第二网络设备中维护有第一网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息，第二网络设备接收到第一请求消息之后，根据第一请求消息中携带的第一指示信息，准确获知第一SSB的状态发生变化，更新第二网络设备中维护的第一网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息中第一SSB的状态。也就是说，第二网络设备维护的第一网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息构成SSB的信息列表，当第一SSB的状态更新时，相当于更新了第二网络设备维护的第一网络设备中的SSB的信息列表。例如，第一请求消息用于请求第二网络设备将第二网络设备维护的第一网络设备中的SSB信息中的第一SSB的状态从激活状态更新为休眠状态，则第二网络设备接收到第一请求消息之后，更新第二网络设备中维护的第一网络设备中至少一个SSB中的第一SSB的状态为休眠状态；
还例如，第一网络设备确定激活第一网络设备中的第一SSB，则第一请求消息用于请求第二网络设备将第二网络设备维护的第一网络设备中至少一个的SSB信息中的第一SSB的状态从休眠状态更新为激活状态，则第二网络设备接收到第一请求消息之后，更新第二网络设备中维护的第一网络设备中至少一个SSB中的第一SSB的状态为激活状态。
示例性地，图2所示的方法流程还包括S122，第二网络设备向第一网络设备发送第一响应消息。
其中，所述第一响应消息用于指示所述第二网络设备是否成功更新所述第一SSB的状态。具体地，当第一请求消息为复用现有的第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送的配置更新消息时，该第一响应消息也可以为复用现有的第二网络设备向第一网络设备发送的配置 更新确认或失败(configuration update acknowledge/failure)消息。其中，现有的配置更新确认或失败消息用于指示更新应用层配置数据成功或失败。或者，第一响应消息为新增第一网络设备与第二网络设备之间的SSB更新确认或失败(SSB update request acknowledge/failure)消息。
例如，第二网络设备成功更新了第一SSB的状态之后，第二网络设备向第一网络设备发送第一响应消息，用于通知第一网络设备所请求的更新第一SSB的状态已被成功执行；还例如，第二网络设备更新第一SSB的状态失败时，第二网络设备向第一网络设备发送第一响应消息，用于通知第一网络设备所请求的更新第一SSB的状态未被成功执行。其中，第二网络设备更新第一SSB的状态失败可能是第二网络设备未成功确定到第一SSB，或者可能是第一SSB的状态被设置为不可更改。
示例性地，当上述第一响应消息用于指示第二网络设备未成功更新第一SSB的状态时，第一响应消息中可携带有第一时长，用于指示第一网络设备在第一时长后能够重新向第二网络设备发送第一请求消息。例如，当第二网络设备更新第一SSB的状态失败时，第一响应消息中包括等待时长10ms，指示第一网络设备在10ms后能够重新向第二网络设备发送第一请求消息。
情况二：
对应S110中的情况二，第一SSB为第二网络设备中的一个SSB时，第一请求消息用于请求第二网络设备激活第一SSB。
应理解，由S110中的情况二中所述的可知，第一网络设备可以确定激活第二网络设备中的一个或多个SSB，在第一网络设备确定激活第二网络设备中的多个SSB的情况下，第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送第一请求消息中可以携带分别指示该多个SSB的多个指示信息，或者，第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送多个第一请求消息，该多个第一请求消息分别携带指示该多个SSB的多个指示信息。本申请实施例中并不限制第一网络设备确定激活第二网络设备中的多个SSB的情况下，第一网络设备如何请求第二网络设备获知该情况，本申请中仅仅限定在第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送的请求消息中，携带有指示某个或某些被激活或关闭的SSB的指示信息。为了便于描述本文中均以第一请求消息中携带指示第一SSB的第一指示信息进行说明。对于第一网络设备确定激活第二网络设备中的多个SSB的情况，第一网络设备如何请求第二网络设备获知该情况本申请中则不再赘述。
示例性地，在本申请实施例中第一请求消息可以是复用现有的第一网络设备与第二网络设备之间的交互信令，并且在现有的信令中新增IE。具体地，新增的IE为用于指示第一SSB的第一指示信息，第一指示信息可以称为SSB信息。
例如，在此情况下第一请求消息可以为现有的第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送的小区激活请求(cell activation request)消息，在该小区激活请求消息中新增SSB信息，其中，现有的小区激活请求消息用于第二网络设备激活被关闭的小区。
示例性地，在本申请实施例中第一请求消息可以是新增的第一网络设备与第二网络设备之间的交互信令，具体地，第一请求消息包括用于指示第一SSB的第一指示信息。
具体地，第一网络设备确定激活第二网络设备中的第一SSB，则第一请求消息用于请求第二网络设备将第二网络设备中的第一SSB激活，第二网络设备中的第一SSB的状态 从休眠状态更新为激活状态。
示例性地，图2所示的方法流程还包括S123，第二网络设备激活第一SSB。
示例性地，图2所示的方法流程还包括S124，第二网络设备向第一网络设备发送第三响应消息，所述第三响应消息用于指示第二网络设备是否成功激活所述第二网络设备中的第一SSB。
具体地，当第一请求消息为复用现有的第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送的小区激活请求消息时，该第三响应消息可以为复用现有的第二网络设备向第一网络设备发送的小区激活响应或失败(cell activation response/failure)消息。其中，现有的小区激活响应消息用于指示之前被关闭的一个或多个小区已经被成功激活，现有的小区激活失败消息用于指示小区激活失败。
示例性地，上述第三响应消息用于指示所述第二网络设备成功激活所述第二网络设备中的第一SSB时，图2所示的方法流程还包括S125，所述第一网络设备更新所述第一SSB的状态。
具体地，第一网络设备中维护有第二网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息，第一网络设备接收到第三响应消息之后，更新第一网络设备中维护的第二网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息列表中第一SSB的状态，从休眠状态更新为激活状态。
综上，第二网络设备之所以在接收到第一请求消息之后能够更新所述第一SSB的状态或者激活所述第一SSB。是因为第一请求消息中携带有指示所述第一SSB的第一指示信息，第二网络设备根据第一指示信息能够准确获知更新哪个SSB的状态，或者，激活哪个SSB。
示例性地，第一指示信息包括以下信息中的至少一种：
所述第一SSB的标识信息、所述第一SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息以及SSB的状态列表，其中，所述SSB的状态列表为所述第一SSB所属的网络设备中SSB状态信息的列表，并且所述SSB的状态列表中的第一SSB为休眠状态或激活状态，或者，所述SSB的状态列表为所述第一SSB的状态列表，或者，所述SSB的状态列表为所述第一SSB所属的网络设备中SSB中除所述第一SSB之外的剩余的SSB的状态列表。
示例性地，所述第一SSB的标识信息包括：
所述第一SSB的物理小区标识；或者，
所述第一SSB的物理小区标识和所述第一SSB的射频参考频率；或者，
所述第一SSB的物理小区标识和所述第一SSB的新无线绝对射频信道号码；或者，
所述第一SSB的物理小区标识、所述第一SSB的新无线绝对射频信道号码和所述第一SSB所在的载波的工作频段；或者，
所述第一SSB的新无线小区全球标识NCGI；或者，
所述第一SSB的标识ID。
示例性地，所述所述第一SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息包括以下信息中的至少一种信息：
所述第一SSB所对应的小区的信道占用的物理资源块PRB的数量信息、以资源块为单位的传输带宽和子载波间隔或者所述第一SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽占总信道带宽的百分比。
其中，第一指示信息可以称之为SSB信息，在前文已经详细介绍SSB信息可能的形式，以及不同的形式下如何指示SSB，这里不再赘述。
示例性地，在所述第一网络设备关闭所述第一SSB之前，可选地，图2所示的方法流程还包括S111，第一网络设备向所述第二网络设备发送第二请求消息。
具体地，所述第二请求消息用于请求将终端设备从所述第一网络设备切换至所述第二网络设备，其中，所述第二请求消息中携带第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述终端设备从所述第一网络设备切换至所述第二网络设备的原因是所述第一SSB即将关闭。其中，第一网络设备请求切换的终端设备为第一网络设备中的第一SSB服务的终端设备，当第一SSB即将被关闭时，该第一SSB将终止为终端设备提供服务，本申请中所涉及的SSB为某个或某些终端设备提供服务指的是该某个或某些终端设备经由该SSB所对应的小区占用的资源传输数据。
示例性地，在进行接入控制时，第二网络设备可以设置从第一网络设备中关闭的第一SSB中切换过来的终端设备的接入优先级。例如，为了保证第一SSB提供服务的终端设备成功切换到由第二网络设备中的预设SSB提供服务，第二网络设备针对第一SSB提供服务的终端设备在进行接入控制时，将第一SSB提供服务的终端设备设置为高优先级优先接入到第二网络设备中。具体地例如，需要新增由第二网络设备中的预设SSB提供服务的终端设备包括新增的UE#1以及第一SSB提供服务的终端设备UE#2，则在进行接入控制时，第二网络设备将UE#2设置为高优先级。
进一步地，图2所示的方法流程还包括S112，第一网络设备接收所述第二网络设备发送的第二响应消息。
具体地，所述第二响应消息用于指示所述第二网络设备中为所述终端设备的资源准备情况。
例如，第二响应消息用于指示所述第二网络设备中为所述终端设备的资源准备完毕，可以接收该终端设备作为由第二网络设备中预设SSB提供服务；还例如，第二响应消息用于指示所述第二网络设备中为所述终端设备的资源未准备完毕。
后续，第二网络设备确定第二网络设备中预设SSB能够为第一SSB提供服务的终端设备提供服务之后。第一网络设备关闭第一SSB。第一SSB提供服务的终端设备切换到由第二网络设备中预设SSB服务。因此终端设备基于第二网络设备中预设SSB与第二网络设备之间进行无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)重配置。
应理解，本实施例中并不限制第一网络设备执行S111和S112之后一定执行后续的S110和S120。也就是说本实施例主要限制的是第二请求消息中携带有用于指示所述终端设备从所述第一网络设备切换至所述第二网络设备的原因是：所述第一SSB即将关闭的第二指示信息。
示例性地，图2中所示的方法可以应用在两个基站之间，其中，基站可以为图1中所示的无线接入网设备。
具体地，本申请是实施例提供另一种通信方法可以应用于多个不同的网络设备之间进行资源协调。下面以两个网络设备(第三网络设备和第五网络设备)之间进行资源协调，但是该两个网络设备之间需要经由其他网络设备进行信令交互为例，介绍本申请实施例提供的通信方法。其中，该两个网络设备互为邻居网络设备，即第三网络设备中维护有第五 网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息，第五网络设备中维护有第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息，本申请实施例中称其他网络设备为第四网络设备，第四网络设备中维护有第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息和第五网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息，应理解，第四网络设备中并不包括SSB，仅仅是维护有其他网络设备中SSB的信息，在本实施例中第四网络设备主要是为了建立第三网络设备和第五网络设备之间的通信。
应理解，本申请中所涉及的某个网络设备中维护有其他网络设备中SSB的信息，在图2中所示的通信方法中已经详细介绍，下面不再赘述。
图3是本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的示意性流程图。包括第三网络设备、第四网络设备、第五网络设备以及步骤S210、S220以及S223其中，第三网络设备可以是图1所示的场景图中的分布式单元#1、第四网络设备可以是图1所示的场景图中的集中单元、第五网络设备可以是图1所示的场景图中的分布式单元#2。下面结合附图3详细介绍步骤S210、S220以及S223。
S210，第三网络设备确定关闭或激活第二SSB。
情况一：
第三网络设备确定关闭或激活第三网络设备中的第二SSB。具体地，本实施例中第三网络设备确定关闭或激活第三网络设备中的第二SSB，与图2中所示的通信方法流程中所示的第一网络设备确定关闭或激活第一网络设备中的第一SSB类似，只是执行主体为第三网络设备，关闭或激活的对象为第三网络设备中的第二SSB，本实施例中不再赘述。
同理，对于第三网络设备来说关闭第二SSB对第三网络设备带来的好处，与图2中所示的第一网络设备确定关闭第一网络设备中的第一SSB后为第一网络设备带来的好处类似；以及对第五网络设备带来的好处，与图2中所示的第一网络设备确定关闭第一网络设备中的第一SSB后为第二网络设备带来的好处类似，本实施例中不再赘述。
示例性地，上述第二SSB为第三网络设备中的一个SSB时，第三网络设备确定关闭或激活所述第二SSB的方式与图2中所示的当第一SSB为第一网络设备中的一个SSB时，第一网络设备确定关闭或激活所述第一SSB类似。例如，可以是第三网络设备基于第三网络设备中的负载信息决定关闭或激活所述第二SSB，或者，第三网络设备接收到关闭或激活SSB指示信息，该关闭或激活SSB指示信息用于指示第三网络设备关闭或激活所述第二SSB，本实施例中不再赘述。
应理解，上述的第三网络设备基于第三网络设备中的负载信息或接收到关闭或激活SSB指示信息决定关闭或激活第二SSB，只是举例说明第三网络设备可以在什么情况下关闭或激活第二SSB，并不对本申请构成任何限定，其他第三网络设备能够确定关闭或激活SSB的情况也在本申请的保护范围之内。
情况二：
第三网络设备确定激活第五网络设备中的SSB的第二SSB。
具体地，本实施例中第三网络设备确定激活第五网络设备中的SSB的第二SSB，与图2中所示的通信方法流程中所示的第一网络设备确定激活第二网络设备中的第一SSB类似，只是执行主体为第三网络设备，激活的对象为第五网络设备中的第二SSB，本实施例中不再赘述。
示例性地，第二SSB为第五网络设备中的一个SSB时，第三网络设备确定激活第二 SSB的方式与图2中所示的当第一SSB为第二网络设备中的一个SSB时，第一网络设备确定激活第一SSB类似。例如，可以是第三网络设备根据第三网络设备中的负载信息确定需要激活第五网络设备中的第二SSB，或者，第三网络设备根据第三网络设备的覆盖信息确定需要激活第五网络设备中的第二SSB，或者，第三网络设备接收到激活SSB指示信息，激活SSB指示信息用于指示激活第五网络设备中的第二SSB，本实施例中不再赘述。
应理解，上述的第三网络设备基于第三网络设备中的负载信息、第三网络设备的覆盖信息或接收到激活SSB指示信息决定激活第五网络设备中的第二SSB，只是举例说明第三网络设备可以在什么情况下决定激活第五网络设备中的第二SSB，并不对本申请构成任何限定，其他第三网络设备能够确定激活第五网络设备中的第二SSB的情况也在本申请的保护范围之内。
具体地，第三网络设备确定关闭或激活第二SSB之后，执行S220，第三网络设备向第四网络设备发送第三请求消息，具体地，第三请求消息中携带有指示第二SSB的第三指示信息，第三指示信息可以称为SSB信息，所述第三请求消息用于请求所述第四网络设备向第五网络设备发送第四请求消息，具体地，第四请求消息中同样携带有指示第二SSB的第三指示信息。
示例性地，图3所示的方法流程还包括S221，第四网络设备更新第二SSB的状态。
具体地，所述第四网络设备中维护有所述第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息和所述第五网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息。第四网络设备更新第二SSB的状态包括以下几种情况：
情况一：
对应S210中的情况一，第二SSB为第三网络设备中的一个SSB，由于第四网络设备中维护有所述第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息，则第四网络设备接收到第三请求消息之后，能够根据第三请求消息中携带的用于指示第二SSB的第三指示信息确定更新第二SSB的状态。具体地，第三指示信息可能的形式与图2中所示的通信方法中涉及的第一指示信息类似，只是第一指示信息用于指示第一SSB而第三指示信息用于指示第二SSB，本实施例中针对第三指示信息不再赘述。
例如，第三网络设备关闭第三网络设备中的第二SSB，则第四网络设备接收到第三请求消息之后，将第四网络设备维护的第三网络设备中至少一个的SSB信息中，第二SSB的状态从激活状态更新为休眠状态；还例如，第三网络设备激活第三网络设备中的第二SSB，第四网络设备接收到第三请求消息之后，将第四网络设备维护的第三网络设备中至少一个的SSB信息中，第二SSB的状态从休眠状态更新为激活状态。
应理解，本申请对于第三请求消息的具体形式并不限制，可以是复用现有的信令，也可以是新增的信令。本申请仅仅限制第三请求消息中携带了上述的指示第二SSB的第三指示信息。
情况二：
对应S210中的情况二，第二SSB为第五网络设备中的一个SSB，由于第四网络设备中还维护有所述所述第五网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息，则第四网络设备接收到第三请求消息之后，能够根据第三请求消息中携带的用于指示第二SSB的第三指示信息确定 更新第二SSB的状态。
具体地，第四网络设备更新第二SSB的状态成功或失败之后，图3所示的方法流程还包括S222，第四网络设备向第三网络设备发送第五响应消息。
具体地，第五响应消息用于指示所述第四网络设备是否成功更新所述第二SSB的状态。
示例性地，若第三请求消息为复用现有的第三网络设备向第四网络设备发送的分布式单元配置更新(gNB-DU configuration update)消息时，该第五响应消息可以为复用现有的第四网络设备向第三网络设备发送的分布式单元配置更新确认/失败(gNB-DU configuration update acknowledge/failure)消息。
例如，第四网络设备成功更新了第二SSB的状态之后，第四网络设备向第三网络设备发送第五响应消息，用于通知第三网络设备所请求的更新第二SSB的状态已被成功执行；还例如，第四网络设备更新第二SSB的状态失败时，第四网络设备向第三网络设备发送第五响应消息，用于通知第三网络设备所请求的更新第二SSB的状态未被成功执行。
示例性地，当上述第五响应消息用于指示第四网络设备未成功更新第二SSB的状态时，第五响应消息中可携带有第二时长，用于指示第三网络设备在第二时长后能够重新向第四网络设备发送第三请求消息。
例如，当第四网络设备更新第二SSB的状态失败时，第五响应消息中包括等待时长10ms，指示第三网络设备在10ms后能够重新向第四网络设备发送第三请求消息。
具体地，第四网络设备接收到第三请求消息之后，图3所示的方法流程还包括S223，第四网络设备向第五网络设备发送第四请求消息。其中，对于第五网络设备来说，接收到第四请求消息可以执行不同的步骤，包括以下两种情况：
情况一：
对应S210中的情况一，第二SSB为第三网络设备中的一个SSB时，第四请求消息用于请求第五网络设备更新第二SSB的状态。
应理解，本申请对于第四请求消息的具体形式并不限制，可以是复用现有的信令，也可以是新增的信令。本申请仅仅限制第四请求消息中携带了上述的第三指示信息。
具体地，第三网络设备关闭第三网络设备中的第二SSB，则第四请求消息用于请求第五网络设备将第五网络设备维护的第三网络设备中至少一个的SSB信息中，第二SSB的状态从激活状态更新为休眠状态；还例如，第三网络设备激活第三网络设备中的第二SSB，则第四请求消息用于请求第五网络设备将第五网络设备维护的第三网络设备中至少一个的SSB信息中，第二SSB的状态从休眠状态更新为激活状态。
示例性地，图3所示的方法流程还包括S224，第五网络设备更新第二SSB的状态。
具体地，第五网络设备中维护有第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息，第五网络设备接收到第四请求消息之后，根据第四请求消息中携带的第三指示信息，准确获知第二SSB的状态发生变化，更新第五网络设备中维护的第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息中第二SSB的状态。也就是说，第五网络设备维护的第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息构成SSB的信息列表，当第二SSB的状态更新时，相当于更新了第五网络设备维护的第三网络设备中的SSB的信息列表。例如，第四请求消息用于请求第五网络设备将第五网络设备维护的第三网络设备中至少一个的SSB信息中，第二SSB的状态从激活状态更 新为休眠状态，则第五网络设备接收到第四请求消息之后，更新第五网络设备中维护的第三网络设备中至少一个SSB中的第二SSB的状态为休眠状态；还例如，第三网络设备确定激活第三网络设备中的第二SSB，则第四请求消息用于请求第五网络设备将第五网络设备维护的第三网络设备中至少一个的SSB信息中，第二SSB的状态从休眠状态更新为激活状态，则第五网络设备接收到第四请求消息之后，更新第五网络设备中维护的第三网络设备中至少一个SSB中的第二SSB的状态为激活状态。
示例性地，图3所示的方法流程还包括S225，第五网络设备向第四网络设备发送第八响应消息，所述第八响应消息用于指示所述第五网络设备是否成功更新所述第二SSB的状态。
示例性地，图3所示的方法流程还包括S2251，第四网络设备向第三网络设备发送第十一响应消息，所述第十一响应消息用于指示所述第五网络设备是否成功更新所述第二SSB的状态。
具体地，当第四请求消息为复用现有的第四网络设备向第五网络设备发送的集中单元配置更新消息时，该第八响应消息可以为复用现有的第五网络设备向第四网络设备发送的集中单元配置更新确认或失败消息。
例如，第五网络设备成功更新了第二SSB的状态之后，第五网络设备向第四网络设备发送第八响应消息，用于指示更新第二SSB的状态已被成功执行；还例如，第五网络设备更新第二SSB的状态失败时，第五网络设备向第四网络设备发送第八响应消息，用指示更新第二SSB的状态未被成功执行。其中，第五网络设备更新第二SSB的状态失败可能是第五网络设备未根据第三指示信息成功确定第二SSB，或者，可能是第二SSB的状态被设置为不可更改。
示例性地，当上述第八响应消息用于指示第五网络设备未成功更新第二SSB的状态时，第八响应消息中可携带有第三时长，用于指示第四网络设备在第三时长后能够重新向第五网络设备发送第四请求消息。
应理解，与上述的第八响应消息类似，第五网络设备成功更新了第二SSB的状态之后，第四网络设备向第三网络设备发送第十一响应消息，用于指示更新第二SSB的状态已被成功执行；还例如，第五网络设备更新第二SSB的状态失败时，第四网络设备向第三网络设备发送第十一响应消息，用指示更新第二SSB的状态未被成功执行。
示例性地，当上述第十一响应消息用于指示第五网络设备未成功更新第二SSB的状态时，第十一响应消息中可携带有第六时长，用于指示第三网络设备在第六时长后能够重新向第四网络设备发送第三请求消息
情况二：
对应S210中的情况二，第二SSB为第五网络设备中的一个SSB时，第四请求消息用于请求第五网络设备激活第二SSB。
例如，第三网络设备确定激活第五网络设备中的第二SSB，则第四请求消息用于请求第五网络设备将第五网络设备中的第二SSB激活，第五网络设备中的第二SSB的状态从休眠状态更新为激活状态。
示例性地，图3所示的方法流程还包括S226，第五网络设备激活第二SSB。
示例性地，图3所示的方法流程还包括S227，第五网络设备向第四网络设备发送第 九响应消息，所述第九响应消息用于指示第五网络设备是否成功激活所述第五网络设备中的第二SSB。
示例性地，上述第九响应消息用于指示所述第五网络设备成功激活所述第五网络设备中的第二SSB时，图3所示的方法流程还包括S228，第四网络设备向第三网络设备发送第六响应消息。
具体地，所述第六响应消息用于指示所述第五网络设备是否成功激活所述第二SSB。
示例性地，上述第三网络设备接收到第六响应消息用于指示所述第五网络设备成功激活所述第五网络设备中的第二SSB时，图3所示的方法流程还包括S229，所述第三网络设备更新所述第二SSB的状态。
具体地，第三网络设备中维护有第五网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息，第三网络设备接收到第六响应消息之后，更新第三网络设备中维护的第五网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息列表中第二SSB的状态，将第二SSB的状态从休眠状态更新为激活状态。
综上，第四网络设备之所以在接收到第三请求消息之后能够更新所述第二SSB的状态，是因为第三请求消息中携带有指示所述第二SSB的第三指示信息，第四网络设备根据第三指示信息能够准确获知更新哪个SSB的状态；同理，第五网络设备之所以在接收到第四请求消息之后能够更新所述第二SSB的状态或者激活所述第二SSB。是因为第四请求消息中携带有指示所述第二SSB的第三指示信息，第五网络设备根据第三指示信息能够准确获知更新哪个SSB的状态，或者，激活哪个SSB。
示例性地，在所述第三网络设备关闭所述第二SSB之前，可选地，图3所示的方法流程还包括S211，第三网络设备向所述第四网络设备发送第五请求消息。
所述第五请求消息用于请求所述第四网络设备向第五网络设备发送第六请求消息，其中，所述第五请求消息中携带第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示所述终端设备从所述第三网络设备切换至所述第五网络设备的原因是所述第二SSB即将关闭。
图3所示的方法流程还包括S212，第四网络设备向所述第五网络设备发送第六请求消息。
所述第六请求消息用于请求将终端设备从所述第三网络设备切换至所述第五网络设备，所述第六请求消息中携带所述第四指示信息。
进一步地，图3所示的方法流程还包括S213，第五网络设备向第四网络设备发送第十二响应消息。所述第十二响应消息用于指示所述第五网络设备中为所述终端设备的资源准备情况。
进一步地，图3所示的方法流程还包括S214，第三网络设备接收第四网络设备发送的第四响应消息。
具体地，所述第四响应消息用于指示所述第五网络设备中为所述终端设备的资源准备情况。
例如，第四响应消息用于指示所述第五网络设备中为所述终端设备的资源准备完毕，可以接收该终端设备作为第五网络设备中的负载；还例如，第四响应消息用于指示所述第五网络设备中为所述终端设备的资源未准备完毕。
应理解，本实施例中并不限制第三网络设备执行S211～S214之后一定执行后续的S210～S220。也就是说本申请主要限制的是第五请求消息和第六请求消息中携带有用于指 示所述终端设备从所述第三网络设备切换至所述第五网络设备的原因是所述第二SSB即将关闭的第四指示信息。
具体地，本申请是实施例提供的另一种通信方法可以应用于网络设备之间进行负载均衡。下面以第四网络设备均衡两个网络设备(第三网络设备和第五网络设备)的负载为例，介绍本申请实施例提供的通信方法。其中，该第三网络设备和第五网络设备互为邻居网络设备，即第三网络设备中维护有所述第五网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息，第五网络设备中维护有所述第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息，本申请实施例中称第三方设备为第四网络设备，所述第四网络设备中维护有所述第三网络设备和所述第五网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息。
图4是本申请实施例提供的又一种通信方法的示意性流程图。包括第三网络设备、第四网络设备、第五网络设备以及步骤S310和S320，其中，第三网络设备可以是图1所示的场景图中的分布式单元#1、第四网络设备可以是图1所示的场景图中的集中单元、第五网络设备可以是图1所示的场景图中的分布式单元#2。下面结合附图4详细介绍步骤S310和S320。
S310，第三网络设备向第四网络设备发送负载报告消息。
具体地，所述负载报告消息用于指示所述第三网络设备中的SSB所对应的小区的负载情况。应理解，负载报告消息可以称为SSB负载消息(SSB load information)。
示例性地，负载报告消息中包括第三网络设备中一个或多个SSB对应的SSB信息，以及该一个或多个SSB分别对应的小区负载信息，其中，一个或多个SSB对应的SSB信息分别用于指示该一个或多个SSB。
示例性地，SSB信息包括SSB的标识信息和SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息中的至少一个。具体是，SSB的标识信息以及SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息在前文已经详细介绍过，这里不再赘述。
示例性地，负载信息包括以下信息中的至少一种：
SSB对应的小区的无线资源利用率信息、SSB对应的小区的硬件负载指标、SSB对应的小区的软件负载指标，SSB对应的小区的容量值以及SSB对应的小区的过载状态指示信息，SSB对应的小区的过载状态指示信息用于指示SSB对应的小区处于过载状态或者非过载状态。
S320，第四网络设备进行负载均衡。
第四网络设备根据接收到第三网络设备发送的负载报告消息，决定激活或者关闭述第三网络设备中第三SSB；或者，第四网络设备根据接收到第三网络设备发送的负载报告消息，决定激活第五网络设备中第四SSB。
例如，如果第三网络设备中的第三SSB所对应的小区的负载小于预定的负载(例如前文所述的低负载门限)，则第四网络设备决定关闭第三网络设备中的第三SSB。还例如，如果第三网络设备中的第三SSB所对应的小区的负载大于或者等于预定的负载(例如前文所述的高负载门限)，并且第四网络设备根据历史测量信息知道第五网络设备中的第四SSB能够提供第三网络设备中第三SSB所需的覆盖，则第四网络设备决定激活第五网络设备中的第四SSB。
示例性地，若第四网络设备根据接收到第三网络设备发送的负载报告消息，确定激活 或者关闭第三网络设备中第三SSB，则图4所示的方法还包括：
S330，第四网络设备向第三网络设备发送第七请求消息。
第七请求消息用于指示所述第三网络设备关闭或激活第三SSB。
示例性地，所述第七请求消息中携带指示第三SSB的第五指示信息，具体地，第五指示信息可能的形式与图2中所示的通信方法中涉及的第一指示信息类似，只是第一指示信息用于指示第一SSB而第五指示信息用于指示第三SSB，本实施例中针对第五指示信息不再赘述。
S331，第三网络设备更新SSB的状态。
第三网络设备接收到第七请求消息之后，更新第三SSB的状态。
具体地，第三网络设备更新SSB的状态包括以下两种情况：
情况一：第七请求消息请求第三网络设备关闭第三SSB。则第三网络设备接收到第七请求消息之后，根据第七请求消息中携带的第五指示信息，获知第三SSB可以关闭，进而将第三SSB的状态从激活状态更新为休眠状态。
情况二：第七请求消息请求第三网络设备激活第三SSB。则第三网络设备接收到第七请求消息之后，根据第七请求消息中携带的第五指示信息，获知第三SSB需要激活，进而将第三SSB的状态从休眠状态更新为激活状态。
S332，第三网络设备向所述第四网络设备发送第七响应消息。
所述第七响应消息用于指示所述第三SSB是否成功关闭或者激活。
具体地，若第七响应消息用于指示第三SSB未成功关闭或者激活，该第七响应消息中可以携带第四时长，用于指示第四网络设备在第四时长后能够重新向第三网络设备发送第七请求消息。
示例性地，若第四网络设备根据接收到第三网络设备发送的负载报告消息，确定激活第五网络设备中第四SSB，则图4所示的方法还包括：
S333，第四网络设备向第五网络设备发送第十请求消息。
第十请求消息用于指示所述第五网络设备激活第四SSB。
示例性地，所述第十请求消息中携带指示第四SSB的第六指示信息，具体地，第六指示信息可能的形式与图2中所示的通信方法中涉及的第一指示信息类似，只是第一指示信息用于指示第一SSB而第五指示信息用于指示第四SSB，本实施例中针对第六指示信息不再赘述。
S334，第五网络设备激活第四SSB的状态。
第五网络设备接收到第十请求消息之后，激活第四SSB。
S335，第五网络设备向第四网络设备发送第十三响应消息。
所述第十三响应消息用于指示所述第四SSB是否成功激活。具体地，若第十三响应消息用于指示第四SSB未成功激活，该第十三响应消息中可以携带第五时长，用于指示第四网络设备在第五时长后能够重新向第五网络设备发送第十请求消息。
可选地，第五网络设备也可以向第四网络设备发送负载报告消息，图4所示的方法还包括S340，第五网络设备向第四网络设备发送负载报告消息。
具体，所述负载报告消息用于指示所述第五网络设备中的SSB所对应的小区的负载情况。
示例性地，负载报告消息中包括第五网络设备中的一个或多个SSB对应的SSB信息，以及该一个或多个SSB分别对应的小区负载信息。
具体地，第五网络设备发送的负载报告消息与第三网络设备向所述第四网络设备发送的负载报告消息内容类似，这不再赘述。
应理解，图4所示的通信方法中，第四网络设备可以仅仅根据第三网络设备发送的负载报告消息，确定关闭或激活第三网络设备中的第三SSB；或者，确定激活第四网络设备中的第四SSB；以及第四网络设备可以仅仅根据第四网络设备发送的负载报告消息，确定关闭或激活第四网络设备中的第四SSB；或者，确定激活第三网络设备中的第三SSB。
应理解，上述各个方法实施例中，上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后，各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定，而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。
前文结合图2-图4详细介绍了本申请提供的通信方法，和在不同场景下的应用流程。下面结合图5-图14详细介绍本申请中涉及的通信装置。
参见图5，图5是本申请提出的通信装置10的示意图。如图5所示，装置10包括发送单元110以及处理单元120。
处理单元120，用于确定关闭或激活第一同步信号与物理广播信道块SSB；
发送单元110，用于向第二网络设备发送第一请求消息，所述第一请求消息中携带有指示所述第一SSB的第一指示信息；
在所述第一SSB为所述通信装置中的一个SSB的情况下，所述第一请求消息用于请求所述第二网络设备更新所述第一SSB的状态，其中，所述第二网络设备中维护有所述通信装置中至少一个SSB的信息；或者，
在所述处理单元确定激活所述第一SSB，且所述第一SSB为所述第二网络设备中SSB中的一个SSB的情况下，所述第一请求消息用于请求所述第二网络设备激活所述第一SSB，其中，所述第一网络设备中维护有所述第二网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息。
装置10和方法实施例中的第一网络设备完全对应，装置10的相应单元用于执行图2所示的方法实施例中由第一网络设备执行的相应步骤。
其中，装置10中的发送单元110执行方法实施例中第一网络设备发送的步骤。例如，执行图2中向第二网络设备发送第一请求消息的步骤120，或执行图2中向第二网络设备发送第二请求消息的步骤111。处理单元120执行方法实施例中第一网络设备内部实现或处理的步骤。例如，执行图2中用于确定关闭或激活第一同步信号与物理广播信道块SSB的步骤110，或执行图2中用于更新第一SSB的状态的步骤125。
可选地，装置10还可以包括接收单元130，用于接收其他设备发送信息。例如，执行图2中接收第二网络设备发送第一响应消息的步骤122，或执行图2中接收第二网络设备发送第二响应消息的步骤112，或执行图2中接收第二网络设备发送第三响应消息的步骤124。
接收单元130和发送单元110可以组成收发单元，同时具有接收和发送的功能。其中，处理单元120可以是处理器。发送单元110可以是发射器。接收单元130可以是接收器。接收器和发射器可以集成在一起组成收发器。
参见图6，图6是适用于本申请实施例的第一网络设备40的结构示意图，可以用于 实现上述通信方法中的第一网络设备的功能。如可以为基站的结构示意图。如图6所示，第一网络设备40可以包括一个或多个射频单元，如远端射频单元(remote radio unit，RRU)401和一个或多个基带单元(base band unit，BBU)。基带单元也可称为数字单元(digital unit，DU)402。所述RRU 401可以称为收发单元，与图5中的发送单元110对应。可选地，该收发单元401还可以称为收发机、收发电路、或者收发器等，其可以包括至少一个天线4011和射频单元4012。可选地，收发单元401可以包括接收单元和发送单元，接收单元可以对应于接收器(或称接收机、接收电路)，发送单元可以对应于发射器(或称发射机、发射电路)。所述RRU401部分主要用于射频信号的收发以及射频信号与基带信号的转换，例如，用于向终端设备发送上述实施例中所述的控制信息。所述BBU402部分主要用于进行基带处理，对基站进行控制等。所述RRU401与BBU402可以是物理上设置在一起，也可以物理上分离设置的，即分布式基站。
所述BBU402为网络设备的控制中心，也可以称为处理单元，可以与图5中的处理单元120对应，主要用于完成基带处理功能，如信道编码，复用，调制，扩频等。例如该BBU(处理单元)402可以用于控制网络设备40执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程，例如，确定承载终端设备的控制信息的符号的长度。
在一个示例中，所述BBU402可以由一个或多个单板构成，多个单板可以共同支持单一接入制式的无线接入网(如，LTE系统，或5G系统)，也可以分别支持不同接入制式的无线接入网。所述BBU402还包括存储器4021和处理器4022。所述存储器4021用以存储必要的指令和数据。例如存储器4021存储上述实施例中的码本等。所述处理器4022用于控制基站进行必要的动作，例如用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程。所述存储器4021和处理器4022可以服务于一个或多个单板。也就是说，可以每个单板上单独设置存储器和处理器。也可以是多个单板共用相同的存储器和处理器。此外每个单板上还可以设置有必要的电路。
应理解，图6所示的网络设备40能够实现图2的方法实施例中涉及的第一网络设备功能。第一网络设备40中的各个单元的操作和/或功能，分别为了实现本申请方法实施例中由第一网络设备执行的相应流程。为避免重复，此处适当省略详述描述。图6示例的第一网络设备的结构仅为一种可能的形态，而不应对本申请实施例构成任何限定。本申请并不排除未来可能出现的其他形态的网络设备结构的可能。
参见图7，图7是本申请提出的通信装置20的示意图。如图7所示，装置20包括接收单元210以及处理单元220。
接收单元210，用于接收第一网络设备发送的第一请求消息，所述第一请求消息中携带有指示所述第一SSB的第一指示信息；所述第一请求消息用于请求所述通信装置中的处理单元220更新第一同步信号与物理广播信道块SSB的状态或激活所述第一SSB；
在所述第一SSB为所述第一网络设备确定关闭或激活的所述第一网络设备中的一个SSB的情况下，处理单元220，用于更新所述第一SSB的状态，其中，所述通信装置中维护有所述第一网络设备中SSB的信息；
在所述第一SSB为所述第一网络设备确定激活的所述通信装置中的一个SSB的情况下，处理单元220，用于激活所述第一SSB，其中，所述第一网络设备中维护有所述通信装置中SSB的信息。
装置20和方法实施例中的第二网络设备完全对应，装置20的相应单元用于执行图2所示的方法实施例中由第二网络设备执行的相应步骤。
其中，装置20中的接收单元210执行方法实施例中第二网络设备接收的步骤。例如，执行图2中接收第一网络设备发送的第一请求消息的步骤120，或执行图2中接收第一网络设备发送的第二请求消息的步骤111。处理单元220执行方法实施例中第二网络设备内部实现或处理的步骤。例如，执行图2中用于更新第一SSB的状态的步骤121，或执行图2中用于激活第一SSB的步骤123。
可选地，装置20还可以包括发送单元230，用于向其他设备发送信息。例如，执行图2中向第一网络设备发送第一响应消息的步骤122，或执行图2中向第一网络设备发送第二响应消息的步骤112，或执行图2中向第一网络设备发送第三响应消息的步骤124。
接收单元210和发送单元230可以组成收发单元，同时具有接收和发送的功能。其中，处理单元220可以是处理器。发送单元230可以是发射器。接收单元210可以是接收器。接收器和发射器可以集成在一起组成收发器。
参见图8，图8是适用于本申请实施例的第二网络设备50的结构示意图，可以用于实现上述通信方法中的第二网络设备的功能。如可以为基站的结构示意图。如图8所示，第二网络设备50可以包括一个或多个射频单元，如远端射频单元(remote radio unit，RRU)501和一个或多个基带单元(base band unit，BBU)。基带单元也可称为数字单元(digital unit，DU)502。所述RRU 501可以称为收发单元，与图7中的接收单元210对应。可选地，该收发单元501还可以称为收发机、收发电路、或者收发器等，其可以包括至少一个天线5011和射频单元5012。可选地，收发单元501可以包括接收单元和发送单元，接收单元可以对应于接收器(或称接收机、接收电路)，发送单元可以对应于发射器(或称发射机、发射电路)。所述RRU501部分主要用于射频信号的收发以及射频信号与基带信号的转换，例如，用于向终端设备发送上述实施例中所述的控制信息。所述BBU502部分主要用于进行基带处理，对基站进行控制等。所述RRU501与BBU502可以是物理上设置在一起，也可以物理上分离设置的，即分布式基站。
所述BBU502为网络设备的控制中心，也可以称为处理单元，可以与图7中的处理单元220对应，主要用于完成基带处理功能，如信道编码，复用，调制，扩频等。例如该BBU(处理单元)502可以用于控制网络设备50执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程，例如，确定承载终端设备的控制信息的符号的长度。
在一个示例中，所述BBU502可以由一个或多个单板构成，多个单板可以共同支持单一接入制式的无线接入网(如，LTE系统，或5G系统)，也可以分别支持不同接入制式的无线接入网。所述BBU502还包括存储器5021和处理器5022。所述存储器5021用以存储必要的指令和数据。例如存储器5021存储上述实施例中的码本等。所述处理器5022用于控制基站进行必要的动作，例如用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程。所述存储器5021和处理器5022可以服务于一个或多个单板。也就是说，可以每个单板上单独设置存储器和处理器。也可以是多个单板共用相同的存储器和处理器。此外每个单板上还可以设置有必要的电路。
应理解，图8所示的网络设备50能够实现图2的方法实施例中涉及的第二网络设备功能。第二网络设备50中的各个单元的操作和/或功能，分别为了实现本申请方法实施例 中由第二网络设备执行的相应流程。为避免重复，此处适当省略详述描述。图8示例的第二网络设备的结构仅为一种可能的形态，而不应对本申请实施例构成任何限定。本申请并不排除未来可能出现的其他形态的网络设备结构的可能。
参见图9，图9是本申请提出的通信装置30的示意图。如图9所示，装置30包括发送单元310以及处理单元320。
处理单元320，用于确定关闭或激活第二同步信号与物理广播信道块SSB；
发送单元310，用于向第四网络设备发送第三请求消息，第三请求消息中携带有指示第二SSB的第三指示信息，第三请求消息用于请求第四网络设备向第五网络设备发送第四请求消息，第四请求消息中携带有第三指示信息，其中，第四网络设备中维护有第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息和第五网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息；在第二SSB为第三网络设备中的一个SSB的情况下，第四请求消息用于请求第五网络设备更新第二SSB的状态，其中，第五网络设备中维护有第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息；或者，第三网络设备确定激活第二SSB，且第二SSB为第五网络设备中的一个SSB时，第四请求消息用于请求第五网络设备激活第二SSB，其中，第三网络设备中维护有第五网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息。
装置30和方法实施例中的第三网络设备完全对应，装置30的相应单元用于执行图3和图4所示的方法实施例中由第三网络设备执行的相应步骤。
其中，装置30中的发送单元310执行方法实施例中第三网络设备发送的步骤。例如，执行图3中向第四网络设备发送第三请求消息的步骤220，或执行图3中向第四网络设备发送第五请求消息的步骤211，或执行图4中向第四网络设备发送负载报告消息的步骤310，或执行图4中向第四网络设备发送第七响应消息的步骤332。处理单元320执行方法实施例中第三网络设备内部实现或处理的步骤。例如，执行图3中用于确定关闭或激活第二SSB的步骤210，或执行图3中用于更新第二SSB的状态的步骤229，或执行图4中用于更新第三SSB的状态的步骤331。
可选地，装置30还可以包括接收单元330，用于接收其他设备发送的信息。例如，执行图3中接收第四网络设备发送第四响应消息的步骤214，或执行图3中接收第四网络设备发送第五响应消息的步骤222，或执行图3中接收第四网络设备发送第十一响应消息的步骤2251，或执行图3中接收第四网络设备发送第六响应消息的步骤228，或执行图3中接收第四网络设备发送第七响应消息的步骤330。
接收单元330和发送单元310可以组成收发单元，同时具有接收和发送的功能。其中，处理单元320可以是处理器。发送单元310可以是发射器。接收单元330可以是接收器。接收器和发射器可以集成在一起组成收发器。
参见图10，图10是适用于本申请实施例的第三网络设备60的结构示意图，可以用于实现上述通信方法中的第三网络设备的功能。该装置60可以包括处理单元610(即，图9中处理单元320的一例)和存储单元620。该存储单元620用于存储指令。
该处理单元610用于执行该存储单元620存储的指令，以使装置60实现如上述方法中第三网络设备执行的步骤。
进一步的，该装置60还可以包括输入口630和输出口640(即，图9中发送单元310的一例)。进一步的，该处理单元610、存储单元620、输入口630和输出口640可以通 过内部连接通路互相通信，传递控制和/或数据信息。该存储单元620用于存储计算机程序，该处理单元610可以用于从该存储单元620中调用并运行该计算计程序，以控制输入口630接收信息，控制输出口640发送信息，完成上述方法中第三网络设备的步骤。该存储单元620可以集成在处理单元610中，也可以与处理单元610分开设置。
可选地，该输入口630为接收器，该输出口640为发送器。其中，接收器和发送器可以为相同或者不同的物理实体。为相同的物理实体时，可以统称为收发器。
参见图11，图11是本申请提出的通信装置70的示意图。如图11所示，装置70包括接收单元410以及发送单元420。
接收单元410，用于接收第三网络设备发送的第三请求消息，第三请求消息中携带有指示第二SSB的第三指示信息，第三请求消息用于请求第四网络设备向第五网络设备发送第四请求消息，第四请求消息中携带有指示第二SSB的第三指示信息，；
发送单元420，用于向第五网络设备发送第四请求消息，第四请求消息用于请求第五网络设备更新第二同步信号与物理广播信道块SSB的状态或激活第二SSB，其中，第四网络设备中维护有第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息和第五网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息；第二SSB为第三网络设备确定关闭或激活的第三网络设备中的一个SSB时，第四请求消息用于请求第五网络设备更新第二SSB的状态，其中，第五网络设备中维护有第三网络设备中SSB的信息；或者，第二SSB为第三网络设备确定激活的第五网络设备中的一个SSB时，第四请求消息用于请求第五网络设备激活第二SSB，其中，第三网络设备中维护有第五网络设备中SSB的信息。
装置40和方法实施例中的第四网络设备完全对应，装置40的相应单元用于执行图3和图4所示的方法实施例中由第四网络设备执行的相应步骤。
其中，装置40中的接收单元410执行方法实施例中第四网络设备接收的步骤。例如，执行图3中接收第三网络设备发送的第三请求消息的步骤220，或执行图3中接收第三网络设备发送的第五请求消息的步骤211，或执行图4中接收第三网络设备发送的负载报告消息的步骤310，或执行图3中接收第三网络设备发送的第七响应消息的步骤332。处理单元220执行方法实施例中第四网络设备内部实现或处理的步骤。例如，执行图3中用于更新第二SSB的状态的步骤221，或执行图4中用于负载均衡的步骤320。
可选地，装置40还可以包括发送单元330，用于向其他设备发送信息。例如，执行图3中向第三网络设备发送第四响应消息的步骤214，或执行图3中向第三网络设备发送第五响应消息的步骤222，或执行图3中向第三网络设备发送发送第十一响应消息的步骤2251，或执行图3中向第三网络设备发送第六响应消息的步骤228，或执行图4中向第三网络设备发送第七响应消息的步骤228。
接收单元410和发送单元430可以组成收发单元，同时具有接收和发送的功能。其中，处理单元420可以是处理器。发送单元430可以是发射器。接收单元410可以是接收器。接收器和发射器可以集成在一起组成收发器。
参见图12，图12是适用于本申请实施例的第四网络设备80的结构示意图，可以用于实现上述通信方法中的第四网络设备的功能。该装置80可以包括处理单元710和存储单元720。该存储单元720用于存储指令。
该处理单元710用于执行该存储单元720存储的指令，以使装置80实现如上述方法 中第四网络设备执行的步骤。
进一步的，该装置80还可以包括输入口730(即，图11中接收单元410的一例)和输出口740(即，图11中发送单元420的另一例)。进一步的，该处理单元710、存储单元720、输入口730和输出口740可以通过内部连接通路互相通信，传递控制和/或数据信息。该存储单元720用于存储计算机程序，该处理单元710可以用于从该存储单元720中调用并运行该计算计程序，以控制输入口730接收信息，控制输出口740发送信息，完成上述方法中第四网络设备的步骤。该存储单元720可以集成在处理单元710中，也可以与处理单元710分开设置。
可选地，该输入口730为接收器，该输出口740为发送器。其中，接收器和发送器可以为相同或者不同的物理实体。为相同的物理实体时，可以统称为收发器。
参见图13，图13是本申请提出的通信装置90的示意图。如图13所示，装置90包括接收单元510以及处理单元520。
接收单元510，用于接收第四网络设备发送的第四请求消息，第四请求消息用于请求第五网络设备更新第二同步信号与物理广播信道块SSB的状态或激活第二SSB，其中，第四网络设备中维护有第三网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息和第五网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息，第三网络设备为向第四网络设备发送第三请求消息，请求第四网络设备向第五网络设备发送第四请求消息的网络设备；
第二SSB为第三网络设备确定关闭或激活的第三网络设备中的一个SSB时，处理单元520，用于更新第二SSB的状态，其中，第五网络设备中维护有第三网络设备中SSB的信息；
第二SSB为第三网络设备确定激活的第五网络设备中的一个SSB时，处理单元520，用于激活第二SSB，其中，第三网络设备中维护有第五网络设备中SSB的信息。
装置50和方法实施例中的第五网络设备完全对应，装置50的相应单元用于执行图3和图4所示的方法实施例中由第五网络设备执行的相应步骤。
其中，装置50中的接收单元510执行方法实施例中第五网络设备接收的步骤。例如，执行图3中接收第四网络设备发送的第四请求消息的步骤223，或执行图3中接收第四网络设备发送的第六请求消息的步骤223，或执行图4中接收第四网络设备发送的第十请求消息的步骤333。处理单元520执行方法实施例中第五网络设备内部实现或处理的步骤。例如，执行图3中用于更新第二SSB的状态的步骤224，或执行图3中用于激活第二SSB的步骤226。
可选地，装置50还可以包括发送单元530，用于向其他设备发送信息。例如，执行图3中向第四网络设备发送第十二响应消息的步骤213，或执行图3中向第四网络设备发送第八响应消息的步骤225，或执行图3中向第四网络设备发送第九响应消息的步骤227，或执行图4中向第四网络设备发送第十三响应消息的步骤335，或执行图4中向第四网络设备发送负载报告消息的步骤340。
接收单元510和发送单元530可以组成收发单元，同时具有接收和发送的功能。其中，处理单元520可以是处理器。发送单元530可以是接收器。接收单元510可以是发射器。接收器和发射器可以集成在一起组成收发器。
参见图14，图14是适用于本申请实施例的第五网络设备100的结构示意图，可以用 于实现上述通信方法中的第五网络设备的功能。该装置100可以包括处理单元1010(即，图13中处理单元520的一例)和存储单元1020。该存储单元1020用于存储指令。
该处理单元1010用于执行该存储单元1020存储的指令，以使装置100实现如上述方法中第五网络设备执行的步骤。
进一步的，该装置100还可以包括输入口1030(即，图13中接收单元510的一例)和输出口1040。进一步的，该处理单元1010、存储单元1020、输入口1030和输出口1040可以通过内部连接通路互相通信，传递控制和/或数据信息。该存储单元1020用于存储计算机程序，该处理单元1010可以用于从该存储单元1020中调用并运行该计算计程序，以控制输入口1030接收信息，控制输出口1040发送信息，完成上述方法中第五网络设备的步骤。该存储单元1020可以集成在处理单元1010中，也可以与处理单元1010分开设置。
可选地，该输入口1030为接收器，该输出口1040为发送器。其中，接收器和发送器可以为相同或者不同的物理实体。为相同的物理实体时，可以统称为收发器。
本申请实施例还提供一种通信系统，其包括前述的一个或多个网络设备。
本申请还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令，当该指令在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述如图2-图4所示的方法中网络设备执行的各个步骤。
本申请还提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品，当该计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行如图2-图4所示的方法中网络设备执行的各个步骤。
本申请还提供一种芯片，包括处理器。该处理器用于调用并运行存储器中存储的计算机程序，以执行本申请提供的通信方法中由网络设备执行的相应操作和/或流程。可选地，该芯片还包括存储器，该存储器与该处理器通过电路或电线与存储器连接，处理器用于读取并执行该存储器中的计算机程序。进一步可选地，该芯片还包括通信接口，处理器与该通信接口连接。通信接口用于接收需要处理的数据和/或信息，处理器从该通信接口获取该数据和/或信息，并对该数据和/或信息进行处理。该通信接口可以是输入输出接口。
以上各实施例中，处理器可以为中央处理器(central processing unit，CPU)、微处理器、特定应用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit，ASIC)，或一个或多个用于控制本申请技术方案程序执行的集成电路等。例如，处理器可以是数字信号处理器设备、微处理器设备、模数转换器、数模转换器等。处理器可以根据这些设备各自的功能而在这些设备之间分配终端设备或网络设备的控制和信号处理的功能。此外，处理器可以具有操作一个或多个软件程序的功能，软件程序可以存储在存储器中。处理器的所述功能可以通过硬件实现，也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。
存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、可存储静态信息和指令的其它类型的静态存储设备、随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)或可存储信息和指令的其它类型的动态存储设备，也可以是电可擦可编程只读存储器(electrically erasable programmable read-only memory，EEPROM)、只读光盘(compact disc read-only memory，CD-ROM)或其他光盘存储、光碟存储(包括压缩光碟、激光碟、光碟、数字通用光碟、蓝光光碟等)、磁盘存储介质或者其它磁存储设备，或者还可以是能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其它介质等。
可选的，上述实施例中涉及的存储器与存储器可以是物理上相互独立的单元，或者，存储器也可以和处理器集成在一起。
本申请实施例中，“至少一个”是指一个或者多个，“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”，描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示单独存在A、同时存在A和B、单独存在B的情况。其中A，B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“以下至少一项”及其类似表达，是指的这些项中的任意组合，包括单项或复数项的任意组合。例如，a，b和c中的至少一项可以表示：a,b,c,a-b,a-c,b-c,或a-b-c，其中a,b,c可以是单个，也可以是多个。
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到，本文中公开的实施例中描述的各单元及算法步骤，能够以电子硬件、计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到，为描述的方便和简洁，上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程，可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程，在此不再赘述。
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中，所揭露的系统、装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的，例如单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。另一点，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口，装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式。
所述作为分离部件说明的单元也可以不是物理上分开的，作为单元显示的部件也可以不是物理单元，即可以位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本申请技术方案的目的。
另外，在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中，也可以是各个单元单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时，可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解，本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中，包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机，服务器，或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括：U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。
以上所述，仅为本申请的具体实施方式，任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内，可轻易想到变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。

Claims (45)

  1. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第一网络设备确定关闭或激活第一同步信号与物理广播信道块SSB；
    所述第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送第一请求消息，所述第一请求消息中携带有指示所述第一SSB的第一指示信息；
    在所述第一SSB为所述第一网络设备中的一个SSB的情况下，所述第一请求消息用于请求所述第二网络设备更新所述第一SSB的状态，其中，所述第二网络设备中维护有所述第一网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息；或者，
    在激活的所述第一SSB为所述第二网络设备中的一个SSB的情况下，所述第一请求消息用于请求所述第二网络设备激活所述第一SSB，其中，所述第一网络设备中维护有所述第二网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的通信方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息包括以下信息中的至少一种：
    所述第一SSB的标识信息、所述第一SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息以及SSB的状态列表，其中，所述SSB的状态列表为所述第一SSB所属的网络设备中SSB状态信息的列表，并且所述SSB的状态列表中的第一SSB为休眠状态或激活状态，或者，所述SSB的状态列表为所述第一SSB的状态列表，或者，所述SSB的状态列表为所述第一SSB所属的网络设备中SSB中除所述第一SSB之外的剩余的SSB的状态列表。
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的通信方法，其特征在于，所述第一SSB的标识信息包括：
    所述第一SSB的物理小区标识；或者，
    所述第一SSB的物理小区标识和所述第一SSB的射频参考频率；或者，
    所述第一SSB的物理小区标识和所述第一SSB的新无线绝对射频信道号码；或者，
    所述第一SSB的物理小区标识、所述第一SSB的新无线绝对射频信道号码和所述第一SSB所在的载波的工作频段；或者，
    所述第一SSB的新无线小区全球标识NCGI；或者，
    所述第一SSB的标识ID。
  4. 根据权利要求2或3所述的通信方法，其特征在于，所述第一SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息包括以下信息中的至少一种：
    所述第一SSB所对应的小区的信道占用的物理资源块PRB的数量信息、以资源块为单位的传输带宽和子载波间隔或者所述第一SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽占总信道带宽的百分比。
  5. 根据权利要求1-4中任一项所述的通信方法，其特征在于，在所述第一SSB为所述第一网络设备中的一个SSB的情况下，所述第一网络设备确定关闭或激活所述第一SSB包括：
    所述第一网络设备基于所述第一网络设备中的负载信息确定关闭或激活所述第一SSB；或者，
    所述第一网络设备接收到关闭或激活SSB指示信息，所述关闭或激活SSB指示信息 用于指示所述第一网络设备关闭或激活所述第一SSB。
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的通信方法，其特征在于，在所述第一网络设备关闭所述第一SSB之前，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一网络设备向所述第二网络设备发送第二请求消息，所述第二请求消息用于请求将终端设备从所述第一网络设备切换至所述第二网络设备，其中，所述第二请求消息中携带第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述终端设备从所述第一网络设备切换至所述第二网络设备的原因是所述第一SSB即将关闭；
    所述第一网络设备接收所述第二网络设备发送的第二响应消息，所述第二响应消息用于指示所述第二网络设备中为所述终端设备的资源准备情况。
  7. 根据权利要求5或6所述的通信方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一网络设备接收所述第二网络设备发送的第一响应消息，所述第一响应消息用于指示所述第二网络设备是否成功更新所述第一SSB的状态。
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的通信方法，其特征在于，所述第一响应消息用于指示所述第二网络设备未成功更新所述第一SSB的状态时，所述第一响应消息中携带有第一时长，用于指示所述第一网络设备在所述第一时长后能够重新发送所述第一请求消息。
  9. 根据权利要求1-4中任一项所述的通信方法，其特征在于，在所述第一SSB为所述第二网络设备中的一个SSB的情况下，所述第一网络设备确定激活所述第一SSB包括：
    所述第一网络设备根据所述第一网络设备中的负载信息确定需要激活第二网络设备中的第一SSB；或者，
    所述第一网络设备根据所述第一网络设备的覆盖信息确定需要激活第二网络设备中的第一SSB；或者，
    所述第一网络设备接收到激活SSB指示信息，所述激活SSB指示信息用于指示激活所述第一SSB。
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的通信方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一网络设备接收所述第二网络设备发送的第三响应消息，所述第三响应消息用于指示所述第二网络设备是否成功激活所述第一SSB。
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的通信方法，其特征在于，所述第三响应消息用于指示所述第二网络设备成功激活所述第一SSB时，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一网络设备更新所述第一SSB的状态。
  12. 根据权利要求1-11中任一项所述的通信方法，其特征在于，所述第一网络设备中维护有所述第二网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息包括：
    所述第一网络设备中维护有所述第二网络设备中至少一个SSB的标识信息、所述第二网络设备中至少一个SSB的状态信息以及所述第二网络设备中至少一个SSB分别对应的至少一个小区的信道的带宽信息；
    所述第二网络设备中维护有所述第一网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息包括：
    所述第二网络设备中维护有所述第一网络设备中至少一个SSB的标识信息、所述第一网络设备中SSB的状态信息以及所述第一网络设备中至少一个SSB分别对应的至少一个小区的信道的带宽信息。
  13. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第二网络设备接收第一网络设备发送的第一请求消息，所述第一请求消息用于请求所述第二网络设备更新第一同步信号与物理广播信道块SSB的状态或激活所述第一SSB，所述第一请求消息中携带有指示所述第一SSB的第一指示信息；
    在所述第一SSB为所述第一网络设备确定关闭或激活的所述第一网络设备中的一个SSB的情况下，所述第二网络设备更新所述第一SSB的状态，其中，所述第二网络设备中维护有所述第一网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息；或者，
    在所述第一SSB为所述第一网络设备确定激活的所述第二网络设备中的一个SSB的情况下，所述第二网络设备激活所述第一SSB，其中，所述第一网络设备中维护有所述第二网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息。
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的通信方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息包括以下信息中的至少一种：
    所述第一SSB的标识信息、所述第一SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息以及SSB的状态列表，其中，所述SSB的状态列表为所述第一SSB所属的网络设备中SSB状态信息的列表，并且所述SSB的状态列表中的第一SSB为休眠状态或激活状态，或者，所述SSB的状态列表为所述第一SSB的状态列表，或者，所述SSB的状态列表为所述第一SSB所属的网络设备中SSB中除所述第一SSB之外的剩余的SSB的状态列表。
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的通信方法，其特征在于，所述第一SSB的标识信息包括：
    所述第一SSB的物理小区标识；或者，
    所述第一SSB的物理小区标识和所述第一SSB的射频参考频率；或者，
    所述第一SSB的物理小区标识和所述第一SSB的新无线绝对射频信道号码；或者，
    所述第一SSB的物理小区标识、所述第一SSB的新无线绝对射频信道号码和所述第一SSB所在的载波的工作频段；或者，
    所述第一SSB的新无线小区全球标识NCGI；或者，
    所述第一SSB的标识ID。
  16. 根据权利要求14或15所述的通信方法，其特征在于，所述第一SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息包括以下信息中的至少一种：
    所述第一SSB所对应的小区的信道占用的物理资源块PRB的数量信息、以资源块为单位的传输带宽和子载波间隔或者所述第一SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽占总信道带宽的百分比。
  17. 根据权利要求13-16中任一项所述的通信方法，其特征在于，在所述第一SSB为所述第一网络设备确定关闭的所述第一网络设备中的一个SSB的情况下，在所述第二网络设备接收第一网络设备发送的第一请求消息之前，所述方法还包括：
    所述第二网络设备接收所述第一网络设备发送的第二请求消息，所述第二请求消息用于请求将终端设备从所述第一网络设备切换至所述第二网络设备，其中，所述第二请求消息中携带第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述终端设备从所述第一网络设备切换至所述第二网络设备的原因是所述第一SSB即将关闭；
    所述第二网络设备向所述第一网络设备发送第二响应消息，所述第二响应消息用于指示所述第二网络设备中为所述终端设备的资源准备情况。
  18. 根据权利要求13-17中任一项所述的通信方法，其特征在于，所述第一SSB为所 述第一网络设备确定关闭或激活的所述第一网络设备中的一个SSB时，所述方法还包括：
    所述第二网络设备向所述第一网络设备发送第一响应消息，所述第一响应消息用于指示所述第二网络设备是否成功更新所述第一SSB的状态。
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的通信方法，其特征在于，所述第一响应消息用于指示所述第二网络设备未成功更新所述第一SSB的状态时，所述第一响应消息中携带有第一时长，用于指示所述第一网络设备在所述第一时长后能够重新发送所述第一请求消息。
  20. 根据权利要求13-16中任一项所述的通信方法，其特征在于，在所述第一SSB为所述第一网络设备确定激活的所述第二网络设备中的一个SSB的情况下，所述方法还包括：
    所述第二网络设备向所述第一网络设备发送第三响应消息，所述第三响应消息用于指示所述第二网络设备是否成功激活所述第一SSB。
  21. 根据权利要求13-20中任一项所述的通信方法，其特征在于，所述第一网络设备中维护有所述第二网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息包括：
    所述第一网络设备中维护有所述第二网络设备中至少一个SSB的标识信息、所述第二网络设备中至少一个SSB的状态信息以及所述第二网络设备中至少一个SSB分别对应的至少一个小区的信道的带宽信息；
    所述第二网络设备中维护有所述第一网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息包括：
    所述第二网络设备中维护有所述第一网络设备中至少一个SSB的标识信息、所述第一网络设备中SSB的状态信息以及所述第一网络设备中至少一个SSB分别对应的至少一个小区的信道的带宽信息。
  22. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：
    处理单元，用于确定关闭或激活第一同步信号与物理广播信道块SSB；
    发送单元，用于向第二网络设备发送第一请求消息，所述第一请求消息中携带有指示所述第一SSB的第一指示信息；
    在所述第一SSB为所述通信装置中的一个SSB的情况下，所述第一请求消息用于请求所述第二网络设备更新所述第一SSB的状态，其中，所述第二网络设备中维护有所述通信装置中至少一个SSB的信息；或者，
    在所述处理单元激活的所述第一SSB为所述第二网络设备中SSB中的一个SSB的情况下，所述第一请求消息用于请求所述第二网络设备激活所述第一SSB，其中，所述第一网络设备中维护有所述第二网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息。
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息包括以下信息中的至少一种：
    所述第一SSB的标识信息、所述第一SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息以及SSB的状态列表，其中，所述SSB的状态列表为所述第一SSB所属的网络设备中SSB状态信息的列表，并且所述SSB的状态列表中的第一SSB为休眠状态或激活状态，或者，所述SSB的状态列表为所述第一SSB的状态列表，或者，所述SSB的状态列表为所述第一SSB所属的网络设备中SSB中除所述第一SSB之外的剩余的SSB的状态列表。
  24. 根据权利要求23所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述第一SSB的标识信息包括：
    所述第一SSB的物理小区标识；或者，
    所述第一SSB的物理小区标识和所述第一SSB的射频参考频率；或者，
    所述第一SSB的物理小区标识和所述第一SSB的新无线绝对射频信道号码；或者，
    所述第一SSB的物理小区标识、所述第一SSB的新无线绝对射频信道号码和所述第一SSB所在的载波的工作频段；或者，
    所述第一SSB的新无线小区全球标识NCGI；或者，
    所述第一SSB的标识ID。
  25. 根据权利要求23或24所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述所述第一SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息包括以下信息中的至少一种：
    所述第一SSB所对应的小区的信道占用的物理资源块PRB的数量信息、以资源块为单位的传输带宽和子载波间隔或者所述第一SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽占总信道带宽的百分比。
  26. 根据权利要求22-24中任一项所述的通信装置，其特征在于，在所述第一SSB为所述通信装置中的一个SSB的情况下，所述处理单元确定关闭或激活所述第一SSB包括：
    所述处理单元基于所述通信装置中的负载信息确定关闭或激活所述第一SSB；或者，
    所述通信装置还包括：
    接收单元，所述接收单元接收到关闭或激活SSB指示信息，所述关闭或激活SSB指示信息用于指示所述处理单元关闭或激活所述第一SSB。
  27. 根据权利要求26所述的通信装置，其特征在于，在所述处理单元关闭所述第一SSB之前，所述发送单元，还用于向所述第二网络设备发送第二请求消息，所述第二请求消息用于请求将终端设备从所述通信装置切换至所述第二网络设备，其中，所述第二请求消息中携带第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述终端设备从所述通信装置切换至所述第二网络设备的原因是所述第一SSB即将关闭；
    所述接收单元，还用于接收所述第二网络设备发送的第二响应消息，所述第二响应消息用于指示所述第二网络设备中为所述终端设备的资源准备情况。
  28. 根据权利要求26或27所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述接收单元，还用于接收所述第二网络设备发送的第一响应消息，所述第一响应消息用于指示所述第二网络设备是否成功更新所述第一SSB的状态。
  29. 根据权利要求28所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述第一响应消息用于指示所述第二网络设备未成功更新所述第一SSB的状态时，所述第一响应消息中携带有第一时长，用于指示所述发送单元在所述第一时长后能够重新发送所述第一请求消息。
  30. 根据权利要求22-25中任一项所述的通信装置，其特征在于，在所述第一SSB为所述第二网络设备中SSB中的一个SSB的情况下，所述处理单元确定激活所述第一SSB包括：
    所述处理单元根据所述通信装置中的负载信息确定需要激活第二网络设备中的第一SSB；或者，
    所述处理单元根据所述通信装置的覆盖信息确定需要激活第二网络设备中的第一SSB；或者，
    所述接收单元接收到激活SSB指示信息，所述激活SSB指示信息用于指示激活所述第一SSB。
  31. 根据权利要求30所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述接收单元，还用于接收所述第二网络设备发送的第三响应消息，所述第三响应消息用于指示所述第二网络设备是否成功激活所述第一SSB。
  32. 根据权利要求31所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述第三响应消息用于指示所述第二网络设备成功激活所述第一SSB时，所述处理单元，还用于更新所述第一SSB的状态。
  33. 根据权利要求22-32中任一项所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置中维护有所述第二网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息包括：
    所述通信装置中维护有所述第二网络设备中至少一个SSB的标识信息、所述第二网络设备中至少一个SSB的状态信息以及所述第二网络设备中至少一个SSB分别对应的至少一个小区的信道的带宽信息；
    所述第二网络设备中维护有所述第一网络设备至少一个中SSB的信息包括：
    所述第二网络设备中维护有所述通信装置中至少一个SSB的标识信息、所述通信装置备中至少一个SSB的状态信息以及所述通信装置中至少一个SSB分别对应的至少一个小区的信道的带宽信息。
  34. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：
    接收单元，用于接收第一网络设备发送的第一请求消息，所述第一请求消息用于请求所述通信装置中的处理单元更新第一同步信号与物理广播信道块SSB的状态或激活所述第一SSB，所述第一请求消息中携带有指示所述第一SSB的第一指示信息；
    在所述第一SSB为所述第一网络设备确定关闭或激活的所述第一网络设备中的一个SSB的情况下，所述处理单元更新所述第一SSB的状态，其中，所述通信装置中维护有所述第一网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息；或者，
    在所述第一SSB为所述第一网络设备确定激活的所述通信装置中的一个SSB的情况下，所述处理单元激活所述第一SSB，其中，所述第一网络设备中维护有所述通信装置中至少一个SSB的信息。
  35. 根据权利要求34所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息包括以下信息中的至少一种：
    所述第一SSB的标识信息、所述第一SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息以及SSB的状态列表，其中，所述SSB的状态列表为所述第一SSB所属的网络设备中SSB状态信息的列表，并且所述SSB的状态列表中的第一SSB为休眠状态或激活状态，或者，所述SSB的状态列表为所述第一SSB的状态列表，或者，所述SSB的状态列表为所述第一SSB所属的网络设备中SSB中除所述第一SSB之外的剩余的SSB的状态列表。
  36. 根据权利要求35所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述第一SSB的标识信息包括：
    所述第一SSB的物理小区标识；或者，
    所述第一SSB的物理小区标识和所述第一SSB的射频参考频率；或者，
    所述第一SSB的物理小区标识和所述第一SSB的新无线绝对射频信道号码；或者，
    所述第一SSB的物理小区标识、所述第一SSB的新无线绝对射频信道号码和所述第一SSB所在的载波的工作频段；或者，
    所述第一SSB的新无线小区全球标识NCGI；或者，
    所述第一SSB的标识ID。
  37. 根据权利要求35或36所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述所述第一SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽信息包括以下信息中的至少一种：
    所述第一SSB所对应的小区的信道占用的物理资源块PRB的数量信息、以资源块为单位的传输带宽和子载波间隔或者所述第一SSB所对应的小区的信道带宽占总信道带宽的百分比。
  38. 根据权利要求34-37中任一项所述的通信装置，其特征在于，在所述第一SSB为所述第一网络设备确定关闭的所述第一网络设备中的一个SSB的情况下，在所述接收单元接收第一网络设备发送的第一请求消息之前，所述接收单元，还用于接收所述第一网络设备发送的第二请求消息，所述第二请求消息用于请求将终端设备从所述第一网络设备切换至所述通信装置，其中，所述第二请求消息中携带第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述终端设备从所述第一网络设备切换至所述通信装置的原因是所述第一SSB即将关闭；
    所述通信装置还包括：
    发送单元，用于向所述第一网络设备发送第二响应消息，所述第二响应消息用于指示所述通信装置中为所述终端设备的资源准备情况。
  39. 根据权利要求34-38中任一项所述的通信装置，其特征在于，在所述第一SSB为所述第一网络设备确定关闭或激活的所述第一网络设备中的一个SSB的情况下，所述发送单元，还用于向所述第一网络设备发送第一响应消息，所述第一响应消息用于指示所述通信装置是否成功更新所述第一SSB的状态。
  40. 根据权利要求39所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述第一响应消息用于指示所述通信装置未成功更新所述第一SSB的状态时，所述第一响应消息中携带有第一时长，用于指示所述第一网络设备在所述第一时长后能够重新发送所述第一请求消息。
  41. 根据权利要求34-37中任一项所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述第一SSB为所述第一网络设备确定激活的所述通信装置中的一个SSB时，所述装置还包括：
    发送单元，用于向所述第一网络设备发送第三响应消息，所述第三响应消息用于指示所述通信装置是否成功激活所述第一SSB。
  42. 根据权利要求34-41中任一项所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述第一网络设备中维护有所述通信装置中至少一个SSB的信息包括：
    所述第一网络设备中维护有所述通信装置中至少一个SSB的标识信息、所述通信装置中至少一个SSB的状态信息以及所述通信装置中至少一个SSB分别对应的至少一个小区的信道的带宽信息；
    所述通信装置中维护有所述第一网络设备中至少一个SSB的信息包括：
    所述通信装置中维护有所述第一网络设备中至少一个SSB的标识信息、所述第一网络设备中至少一个SSB的状态信息以及所述第一网络设备中至少一个SSB分别对应的至少一个小区的信道的带宽信息。
  43. 一种通信系统，其特征在于，包括：
    如权利要求22-33中任一项所述的通信装置，以及如权利要求34-42中任一项所述的通信装置。
  44. 一种通信设备，其特征在于，包括：
    存储器，用于存储计算机程序；
    收发器，用于执行如权利要求1至21中任一项所述的通信方法中的收发步骤；
    处理器，用于执行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序，以使得所述通信设备执行如权利要求1至21中任一项所述的通信方法。
  45. 一种计算机可读存储介质，包括计算机程序，当其在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1至21中任一项所述的通信方法。
PCT/CN2020/074256 2019-02-15 2020-02-04 通信方法和通信装置 WO2020164408A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP20755403.1A EP3920614A4 (en) 2019-02-15 2020-02-04 COMMUNICATION METHOD AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE
US17/401,682 US20210377887A1 (en) 2019-02-15 2021-08-13 Communication method and communications apparatus

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201910118205.2A CN111586842B (zh) 2019-02-15 2019-02-15 通信方法和通信装置
CN201910118205.2 2019-02-15

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US17/401,682 Continuation US20210377887A1 (en) 2019-02-15 2021-08-13 Communication method and communications apparatus

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020164408A1 true WO2020164408A1 (zh) 2020-08-20

Family

ID=72045095

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/074256 WO2020164408A1 (zh) 2019-02-15 2020-02-04 通信方法和通信装置

Country Status (4)

Country Link
US (1) US20210377887A1 (zh)
EP (1) EP3920614A4 (zh)
CN (2) CN117098236A (zh)
WO (1) WO2020164408A1 (zh)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2022120303A1 (en) * 2020-12-04 2022-06-09 Qualcomm Incorporated Scan-based synchronization signal block (ssb) configuration for a base station

Families Citing this family (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN112714487B (zh) * 2020-12-21 2022-12-02 展讯通信（上海）有限公司 一种通信方法、装置和电子设备
CN114501610B (zh) * 2022-04-02 2022-07-15 北京云智软通信息技术有限公司 小区同步方法及装置
CN116939652A (zh) * 2022-04-07 2023-10-24 维沃移动通信有限公司 Ssb指示方法、装置、设备、系统及存储介质
CN117528726A (zh) * 2022-08-05 2024-02-06 北京三星通信技术研究有限公司 无线通信系统中的节点及其执行的方法

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102781042A (zh) * 2012-07-31 2012-11-14 武汉邮电科学研究院 一种基于物理小区标识的lte负载均衡方法
CN104796242A (zh) * 2014-01-22 2015-07-22 电信科学技术研究院 一种发送和接收同步信号的方法、系统及设备
CN108934071A (zh) * 2017-05-25 2018-12-04 维沃移动通信有限公司 一种同步信号块的传输方法、网络设备及终端
WO2018225989A1 (ko) * 2017-06-04 2018-12-13 엘지전자 주식회사 무선 통신 시스템에서, 시스템 정보를 수신하는 방법 및 이를 위한 장치
CN109041198A (zh) * 2017-06-30 2018-12-18 华为技术有限公司 一种通信方法及装置
WO2018230984A1 (ko) * 2017-06-16 2018-12-20 엘지전자 주식회사 동기 신호 블록을 측정하는 방법 및 이를 위한 장치

Family Cites Families (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN108810983B (zh) * 2017-05-05 2021-07-09 华为技术有限公司 发送和接收信息的方法、网络设备和终端设备
CN109150451B (zh) * 2017-06-16 2023-06-20 华为技术有限公司 通信方法、网络节点和无线接入网系统
US10530623B2 (en) * 2017-07-14 2020-01-07 Qualcomm Incorporated Reference signal design
WO2019016987A1 (en) * 2017-07-20 2019-01-24 Nec Corporation SYSTEM AND METHODS FOR USE IN TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING SYSTEM INFORMATION IN ADVANCED WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
US11064424B2 (en) * 2017-07-25 2021-07-13 Qualcomm Incorporated Shared spectrum synchronization design
US10986617B2 (en) * 2018-08-07 2021-04-20 FG Innovation Company Limited Method and apparatus for activating PUCCH spatial relation
US20200053781A1 (en) * 2018-08-08 2020-02-13 Idac Holdings, Inc. Ss block methods and procedures for nr-u
JP7315681B2 (ja) * 2019-02-14 2023-07-26 テレフオンアクチーボラゲット エルエム エリクソン（パブル） 無線リンクモニタリング、ビーム障害検出、及びビーム障害回復のためのユーザ装置からネットワークへの報告

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102781042A (zh) * 2012-07-31 2012-11-14 武汉邮电科学研究院 一种基于物理小区标识的lte负载均衡方法
CN104796242A (zh) * 2014-01-22 2015-07-22 电信科学技术研究院 一种发送和接收同步信号的方法、系统及设备
CN108934071A (zh) * 2017-05-25 2018-12-04 维沃移动通信有限公司 一种同步信号块的传输方法、网络设备及终端
WO2018225989A1 (ko) * 2017-06-04 2018-12-13 엘지전자 주식회사 무선 통신 시스템에서, 시스템 정보를 수신하는 방법 및 이를 위한 장치
WO2018230984A1 (ko) * 2017-06-16 2018-12-20 엘지전자 주식회사 동기 신호 블록을 측정하는 방법 및 이를 위한 장치
CN109041198A (zh) * 2017-06-30 2018-12-18 华为技术有限公司 一种通信方法及装置

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2022120303A1 (en) * 2020-12-04 2022-06-09 Qualcomm Incorporated Scan-based synchronization signal block (ssb) configuration for a base station
US11595924B2 (en) 2020-12-04 2023-02-28 Qualcomm Incorporated Scan-based synchronization signal block (SSB) configuration for a base station

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP3920614A1 (en) 2021-12-08
CN111586842B (zh) 2023-09-05
CN111586842A (zh) 2020-08-25
EP3920614A4 (en) 2022-04-13
US20210377887A1 (en) 2021-12-02
CN117098236A (zh) 2023-11-21

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2020164408A1 (zh) 通信方法和通信装置
WO2020062971A1 (zh) 传输信号的方法和通信装置
US20230108714A1 (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting control message in wireless communication system
US20200120708A1 (en) Uplink Resource Grant Method and Apparatus, and System
US11638236B2 (en) Control channel structure design to support V2X traffic
US11825474B2 (en) Service transmission method and apparatus
US20230037559A1 (en) Method and apparatus for providing service in wireless communication system
US11849460B2 (en) Methods and apparatus for managing a bandwidth part
CN110971349B (zh) 一种重复传输方法、终端和网络侧设备
US20230047000A1 (en) Method and apparatus for determining transport block size
US11784746B2 (en) Bandwidth puncture and response rules
US20230164757A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
US20230112049A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus for open radio access network (o-ran)
US20230164688A1 (en) Method and system for managing power of radio unit (ru)
US20220182910A1 (en) Data Processing Method, Apparatus, And System
CN110971358B (zh) 一种重复传输的激活方法、终端和网络侧设备
US11082897B2 (en) Connection establishment method and apparatus
US20200022220A1 (en) Information transmission method, processing method, and apparatus
US20230362749A1 (en) Method and apparatus to optimize conditional pscell addition and change (cpac) in wireless communication system
WO2024026832A1 (zh) 无线通信的方法及装置
WO2023024704A1 (zh) 通信方法以及通信装置
US20230095886A1 (en) Method for Broadcast Radio Communication Services
US20240096223A1 (en) Method and apparatus for reporting flight path of terminal in mobile communication system
WO2024051169A1 (zh) 小区组网方法、装置、存储介质及电子装置
WO2022198521A1 (zh) 传输物理下行控制信道的方法及设备

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20755403

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2020755403

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20210903